Buick Owner's Manual 2005 Rendezvous Owners

User Manual: Buick sitemap

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 480

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2005 Buick Rendezvous Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-20
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-43
Airbag System
......................................... 1-67
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-83
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors .................................................... 2-31
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-33
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-34
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-38
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-47
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-47
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-28
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-37
Message Center ....................................... 3-51

Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-62
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-75
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-36
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-47
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-53
Tires
...................................................... 5-55
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-95
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-103
Electrical System
.................................... 5-104
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-112
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-11
Index .................................................................1

Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK, the
BUICK Emblem, and the name RENDEZVOUS are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears
in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05RENDEZVOUS A First Edition
ii

About Driving Your Vehicle
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident. See Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
on page 4-2.

How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.

Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”

{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Vehicle Symbols

Also, in this manual you will find these notices:

The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.

Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

✍ NOTES

Section 1

Seats and Restraint Systems

Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Passenger Seat ..................................1-3
Four-Way Manual Driver Seat ..........................1-3
Six-Way Power Seats .....................................1-4
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-5
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8
Split Bench Seats ...........................................1-8
Captain Chairs .............................................1-13
Stowable Seat ..............................................1-17
Safety Belts ...................................................1-20
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-20
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-24
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-25
Driver Position ..............................................1-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-33
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-34
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-34
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-34
Center Rear Passenger Position .....................1-38
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults .......................................1-40

Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-42
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-42
Child Restraints .............................................1-43
Older Children ..............................................1-43
Infants and Young Children ............................1-45
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-48
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-52
Top Strap ....................................................1-53
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-54
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-58
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ............................................1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ............................................1-62
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-64
Airbag System ...............................................1-67
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-70
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-73
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-75
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-75

1-1

Section 1

Seats and Restraint Systems

What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-76
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-77
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-82
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-82

1-2

Restraint System Check ..................................1-83
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-83
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-83

Front Seats

Four-Way Manual Driver Seat

Manual Passenger Seat
Pull up on the lever,
located on the front of the
seat, to unlock and
move the seat.

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Use the lever located on
the front left side of the
seat to adjust the seat
forward or rearward.
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the
lever. To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to
move the seat back and forth with your body.

Pull up the lever to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to
where you want it and release the lever.
1-3

To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to move
the seat back and forth with your body.
To raise the seat, pull up on
the lever located on the
front right side of the seat.

Six-Way Power Seats
Your vehicle may have this
feature. If it does, the
six-way power seat control
is located on the outboard
sides of the driver’s and
front passenger’s seats.

• Move the front of the control up or down to adjust the
front portion of the cushion up or down.
To lower the seat, push the lever down. Adjust the seat
and release the lever.

• Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust the
rear portion of the cushion up or down.

• Lift up or push down on the whole control to move
the entire seat up or down.

• To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide
the control forward or rearward.

1-4

Manual Lumbar

Heated Seats
The knob that controls this
feature is located on the
outboard sides of the
driver’s and front
passenger’s seats.

Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase
lumbar support. Turn the knob toward the rear of the
vehicle to decrease lumbar support.

Your vehicle may have
heated seats. If it does,
the heated seat switches
are located in the
instrument panel
switchbank.

This feature will quickly heat the seat cushions and
lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seat.
The left switch is for the driver’s seat and the right switch
is for the front passenger’s seat.
Press the top of the switch to turn the heater on. Press
the bottom of the switch to turn the heater off. The
heated seat switch will turn off when the ignition
is turned to OFF and will resume operation when the
ignition is turned to ON, unless the switch is turned off.

1-5

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a seatback, pull up on the lever located on
the outboard side of the driver’s or front passenger’s
seats. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you
want it. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it’s
locked into position. Pull up on the lever, and the seat
will go to its original upright position.

1-6

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.

Head Restraints

{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The front seat head restraints are adjustable. Slide the
head restraint up or down to adjust it.
The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle may be
adjustable. They work the same as the front seat head
restraints.
1-7

Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seats in your vehicle have seat operating
features to adjust, fold, remove and reinstall the seats.
By using the seat operating procedures, in the
correct order, you can easily remove the seats from
your vehicle.
When you put the seats back in the vehicle, be sure to
follow the label on the back of the seat for proper
location.

Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.

To recline the seatback
on base-level split bench
seats, lift up on the recliner
lever located on the
outboard side of the
seatback.

Split Bench Seats
If your vehicle has the split bench seat, the seatbacks can
be folded forward or reclined individually and the sections
can be flipped forward or removed individually.

Base-Level

1-8

To recline the seatback on
up-level split bench seats,
push forward on the
recliner lever located on
the outboard side of
the seatback.

Removing the Split Bench Seat
Each section of the split bench seat can be flipped
forward or removed individually.

Up-Level
Move the seatback to the desired position.
It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you lean
forward and take the weight off the seatback.
The seatbacks on each section also fold forward to put
items behind the seats.

1. Unlatch the shoulder belt from the lap-belt.

Lift up or push forward on the recliner lever and fold the
seatback forward. The seatback will lock into place
when you push it back to the upright position.

3. Lift up or push forward on the seatback recliner
lever to fold the seatback forward.

2. Make sure that the seatback is in the upright position.

After raising a seatback to an upright position, push and
pull on the seatback to check that it is locked upright.

1-9

Base-Level
4. For base-level split bench seats, pull the lever at
the base of the seat on the outboard side to
release the rear latches from the floor pins and flip
the seat forward.
For up-level split bench seats, continue pushing
forward on the recliner lever to release the rear
latches from the floor pins and flip the seat forward.
The seat can stay in this position or it can be
removed from the vehicle by following the next steps.

1-10

5. To release the front latches, squeeze the angled
latch release bar toward the straight crossbar.
6. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward the
rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out.
Repeat these steps for the other section of the split
bench seat.

Replacing the Split Bench Seat

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.

{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
Make sure that the seatback is in the folded forward
position and that the safety belts are on the correct
section of the seat.
Don’t put the sections of the bench seat in so that they
face rearward because they won’t latch that way.
The split bench seat sections have seat position labels,
located on the back of each section, showing where
the section must go.
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the
legs to attach correctly.

1-11

1. Squeeze the angled latch release bar toward the
straight crossbar while placing the front hooks of
the bench seat onto the front two floor pins.
2. Make sure that the
bench seat is angled
so that the front
hooks clear the floor
pins. If the front
legs are not attached
correctly, the rear
legs will not attach
to the rear set of
floor pins.
1-12

3. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins
by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
4. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
5. Lift the seatback recliner lever and raise the
seatback until it locks upright.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked upright.
7. Attach the lap belt.

Captain Chairs
If your vehicle has captain’s chairs, the chairs and
seatbacks can be adjusted forward or rearward.

Adjusting the Captain’s Chairs
(Second Row)
To adjust the second row captain’s chairs, use the
adjustment bar located below the front of each seat.
Lift up the lever to slide the seat forward or rearward.
Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked into place.

Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback, lift up on the recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seatback. Use the
recliner lever to move the seatback to the desired
position.
It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you lean
forward and take the weight off the seatback.
The seatbacks on the second row captain’s chairs fold
forward the same way.
After raising a seatback to an upright position, push and
pull on the seatback to check that it is locked upright.

1-13

Removing the Captain’s Chairs
1. Make sure that the seatback is in the upright position.
2. Lift the seatback recliner lever to fold the seatback
forward.

4. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor pins.
5. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward
the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out.
Repeat these steps for the other captain’s chair.
3. Pull the nylon strap behind the chair to release the
rear hooks from the floor pins.

1-14

Replacing the Captain’s Chairs

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
Make sure that the seatback is in the folded forward
position and that the safety belts are on the correct side
of the chair.
Don’t put the chairs in so that they face rearward
because they won’t latch that way.
The captain’s chairs have seat position labels, located
on the back of each section, showing where the section
must go.
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the
legs to attach correctly.

1-15

1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.

2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear
latches onto the rear set of floor pins.
3. Push and pull on the seat to check that it is
properly attached.

1-16

Stowable Seat
The stowable seat is a two passenger bench seat and
comes with the rear convenience center. See Rear
Convenience Center on page 2-44 for more information.
The stowable seat can be removed and replaced or,
with the seatback folded, it can lie flat with the
convenience center.

To fold the seatback down,
pull up on the lever located
on the back of the seat.
Push down on the
seatback until it is locked
into place.

Folding the Seatback

Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is
locked into place.
To raise the seatback, do one of the following:

• From the rear of the vehicle, pull up on the lever to
release the seatback. Then pull the strap, located
on the right side of the seat, to pull the seatback up.
The seatback has a pocket to stow the strap on
the side of the seatback when not in use, or

• from the passenger’s side door, pull up on the lever
to release the seatback. Then push up on the
seatback to raise the seat.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is
locked into the upright position.
1-17

Removing the Stowable Seat
1. Remove the convenience center, if it is in the
vehicle. See Rear Convenience Center on
page 2-44 for more information.

Replacing the Stowable Seat

{CAUTION:

2. Make sure all items are off the stowable seat.
3. If the seatback is down, put the seatback in
its upright position before removing the seat.
See “Folding the Seatback” listed previously.
4. From the front of the bench seat, remove the two
nuts from the brackets, located on the floor on
each side.

If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.

5. From behind the bench seat, fold the seatback down.
6. Remove the rear nuts located on the floor on
each side.
7. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward the
rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out through
the rear of the vehicle. This should be done in one
motion.
8. Put the nuts back onto the screws so the nuts do
not get misplaced.

1-18

{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
Do not put the stowable seat in so that it faces rearward.
The stowable seat has to go in before the rear
convenience center. See Rear Convenience Center on
page 2-44 for more information.

Make sure that the seatback is folded forward before
beginning this procedure.
1. Remove the nuts from the screws.
2. Place the stowable seat on the vehicle floor so that
the brackets are placed over the screws.
3. Reinstall the nuts back onto the screws. Torque to
approximately 18 lb ft (25 Y).
4. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is
locked down.
5. Raise the seatback to its upright position.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it
is locked into place.

The stowable seat has seat position labels, located on
the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go.
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the
legs to attach correctly.

1-19

Safety Belts

{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.

1-20

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-41.

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.

1-21

Put someone on it.

1-22

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

1-23

Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-24

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-43
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-45. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.

Safety belts are for everyone.

Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.

1-25

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-26

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If
the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-42.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-27

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-28

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-29

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-30

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-31

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-32

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.

To move it down, push down on the button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position.
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where
you want it, try to move it down without pushing the
button down to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
1-33

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Right Front Passenger Position

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-25.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.

Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-34

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here is how to wear one properly.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-42.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-35

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the pelvic bones. And you would be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under
it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to
take belt restraining forces.

1-36

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle.

1-37

Center Rear Passenger Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone can sit in the
center position.
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. You also
have a shoulder belt, which has a retractor. In order to
have the protection of the shoulder belt, you must
first connect it to the lap belt.

1. Remove the shoulder belt from its stowage location
in the roof and pull it all the way down to the lap belt.

1-38

2. Insert the metal knob on the shoulder belt into the
keyhole on the lap belt buckle as shown. Be sure to
slide the shoulder belt part into the keyhole until
it locks into place.

3. To make the lap belt longer, tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.

1-39

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear safety belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is a guide available for the center passenger
position in the second row rear seat. To provide added
safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child
restraints and booster seats and for smaller adults, the
comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug
4. Buckle, position and release the lap-shoulder belt
the same way as the other lap-shoulder belts. If
the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-42.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.

1-40

Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the
safety belt:

2. Attach the elastic cord to the comfort guide on the
center passenger shoulder belt.
Second Row Center Position
For second row center position do the following:
1. Remove the elastic cord from under the head
restraint of the second row driver’s side position.

1-41

Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although
you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-83.

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Center Rear Passenger Position
on page 1-38. Make sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the elastic cord, remove it from
the comfort guide. The elastic cord will go back
under the head restraint.

1-42

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints
Older Children

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-43

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat, see Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small
Adults on page 1-40.

{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.

1-44

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This
applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.

1-45

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240-lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.

Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.

1-46

Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?

{CAUTION:

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.

Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

1-47

Child Restraint Systems

{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.

1-48

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

1-49

Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

1-50

One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.

1-51

Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the air bag deploys.

1-52

(Continued)

CAUTION:

(Continued)

Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.

Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an
adjustable head restraint, route the top strap under it.

1-53

If you are using a top strap-equipped child restraint in
the second row center bench seat and need to
temporarily transport a flat tire for repair, move the child
restraint to a rear seat outboard position. See Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position
on page 1-60 for more on this, including important safety
information.

Top Strap Anchor Location

Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.

Captain’s Chairs

1-54

Second Row Outside Position Bench Seat

Second Row Center Position Bench Seat without
Third Row Seat

1-55

Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. An anchor bar for a top strap is
located at the rear of the seat cushion for each second
row outboard seating position. The anchor bar for the
center position bench seat is located on the floor behind
the second row seats. If the vehicle has the extended rear
convenience center, you need to remove a plastic plug
and look under the convenience center to find the anchor
bar for the center position bench seat.
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place
to anchor the top strap in this position.

Second Row Center Position Bench Seat with Third
Row Seat
If the vehicle has a third row seat and the seatback is
upright, there is an anchor strap located between the third
row seatback and cushion to anchor the child restraint for
the second row center position bench seat.

1-56

Second Row Center Position Bench Seat with Third
Row Seat Folded Down
If the vehicle has a third row seat and the seatback is
folded, there is an anchor on the back of the third
row seat for the second row center position bench seat.

Third Row Passenger’s Side Outside Position
There is also a top strap anchor for the third row
passenger’s side outside position. Locate the anchor
symbol on the flap of carpet behind the seat. Lift up the
carpet to access the anchor.

1-57

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors in the second row outside passenger positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.

A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether

1-58

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors for this
child restraint system,
each seating position with
the LATCH system has
a label on the seatback.
The labels are located at each lower anchor position,
near the base of the second row outside passenger
positions.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage

{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-59

Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-58.

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-58. See Top Strap
on page 1-53 if the child restraint has one.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-53.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.

1-60

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-61

Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-58. See Top Strap
on page 1-53 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in the center rear seating position.

4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-62

To secure a child restraint in this position, you will use
only the lap part of the belt. Disconnect the shoulder
part of the belt and store it before securing child
restraint. See Center Rear Passenger Position on
page 1-38.
If you are using a top strap-equipped child restraint in
the center rear seat and need to temporarily transport a
flat tire for repair, move the child restraint to a rear
seat outboard position. See Securing a Child Restraint
in a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-60 for
more on this, including important safety information.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.

5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-63

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. When you remove the child restraint, be
sure to reconnect the lap and shoulder parts of the belt
so they will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-52.
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-77
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-42
for more information on this including important
safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-3
or Six-Way Power Seats on page 1-4.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-58.

1-64

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. See Top Strap on
page 1-53 if your child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-77. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-3 or
Six-Way Power Seats on page 1-4.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
ON or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-42.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

1-65

7. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit and
stay lit in the inside rearview mirror when the
key is turned to ON or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more
of the belt from the retractor once the lock has
been set.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-66

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.

Airbag System
Your vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for the
driver and another frontal airbag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact
airbags. Side impact airbags are available for the driver
and right front passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG will
appear on the airbag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.

1-67

Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:

{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
airbags have provided in the past.
CAUTION:

1-68

(Continued)

CAUTION:

(Continued)

Side impact airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate with
great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you
are too close to an inflating airbag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for airbag inflation before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door.

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-43 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-45.

1-69

There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.

Where Are the Airbags?

The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-41
for more information.

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

1-70

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-71

{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.

If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.

1-72

When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate and a more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level
less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your
vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or
deform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment is
about 12 to 20 mph (19 to 33 km/h), and the threshold
level for a full deployment is about 21 to 25 mph
(34 to 40 km/h). (The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.)

1-73

Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For
example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.

• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at
a different crash speed than if the object does
not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.

1-74

Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag.
See Airbag System on page 1-67 for more information.
Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
likely help the occupant. A side impact airbag will
only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?

How Does an Airbag Restrain?

In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal airbag modules
are located inside the steering wheel and instrument
panel. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the airbag
modules are located in the seatback closest to the
driver’s and/or right front passenger’s door.

In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact airbag.

1-75

What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbag inflated.
Some components of the airbag module will be hot for a
short time. These components include the steering wheel
hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. For
vehicles with side impact airbags, the side of the
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot
to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do
so. If you have breathing problems but can not
get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or a
door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the air bag
system will not be there to help you in another crash.
A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
1-76

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 7-10.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, the airbag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the airbag module in the steering
wheel, both the airbag module and the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or both
the airbag module and seatback for the driver’s and
right front passenger’s side impact airbag. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings.

Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The
passenger airbag status indicator in the rearview mirror
will be visible when you turn your ignition key to ON
or START. The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on
and off, will be visible during the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off
will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-42.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada

1-77

The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.

1-78

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat

• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint

• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat

• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time

• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints

• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal air bag, the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-64.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.

1-79

The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.

1-80

{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-41 for more on this, including
important safety information.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-82 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.

{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.

1-81

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.

{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an airbag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-82

Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the advanced airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Restraint System Check

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.

1-83

If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.

1-84

After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-41.

Section 2

Features and Controls

Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-10
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Liftgate ........................................................2-11
Windows ........................................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-15
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-15
PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-17
PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-21
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-21
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-22

Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-23
All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-26
Parking Brake ..............................................2-26
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-28
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-29
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-29
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-30
Mirrors ...........................................................2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-31
Outside Power Mirror ....................................2-31
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-32
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-32
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-32
OnStar® System .............................................2-33
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-34
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-35
Storage Areas ................................................2-38
Glove Box ...................................................2-38
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-39
Cell Phone Storage Area ...............................2-39
Overhead Console ........................................2-39
Floor Console Storage Area ...........................2-39

2-1

Section 2

Features and Controls

Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................2-40
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-40
Roof Rack System ........................................2-40
Convenience Net ..........................................2-43
Cargo Cover ................................................2-43
Rear Convenience Center ..............................2-44

2-2

Sunroof .........................................................2-47
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-47
Memory Seat ...............................................2-47

Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.

2-3

Your vehicle’s key can be used for the ignition as well
as the driver’s door lock, the floor console, and the glove
box. If you need a new key, contact your dealer, who
can obtain the correct key code.
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft
system. The key has a transponder in the key head that
matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.
If a replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase this key from your dealer. The
key will have PK3® stamped on it. Keep the bar code
tag that came with the original keys. Give this tag to your
dealer if you need a new key made.
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key® III on
page 2-17 for more information on programming
your new key.

2-4

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, see
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more
information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-33
for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-6.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

2-5

Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can
lock and unlock your doors
from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.

If you would like to program the way the headlamps and
parking lamps operate with remote unlock confirmation,
and your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-66.
LOCK: To lock all doors, press LOCK.
The LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter will arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15 for more
information.
If you would like to program the way the headlamps,
parking lamps, horn, and radio operate with remote lock
confirmation, and your vehicle is equipped with the
Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-66.

UNLOCK: Press UNLOCK to unlock only the driver’s
door. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds,
the passengers’ doors and the liftgate will unlock.
See “Liftgate Release” under Liftgate on page 2-11 for
more information.
The UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15 for more
information.

2-6

REAR: To unlock the liftgate, press REAR. See Liftgate
on page 2-11 for more information.

L (Remote Alarm): Press the button with the horn
symbol to make the headlamps and parking lamps flash
and the horn sound. This will allow you to attract
attention, if needed. Press the button with the horn
symbol again to stop the alarm from sounding, or the
alarm will turn off after 90 seconds.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.

You can tell the battery is weak if the KEY FOB
BATTERY LOW message appears in the message
center. If you get this message, the battery in the key
fob needs to be replaced.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into the slot on
the side of the transmitter and twist to separate the
halves.

See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.

2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not
use the metal flanges to remove the battery.

Battery Replacement

3. Replace the battery.

Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves
are snapped together tightly so water will not get in.
5. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for
seven seconds to synchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the transmitter operation.

United States

Canada

2-7

Doors and Locks
Door Locks

{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.

2-8

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
To unlock the driver’s door from the outside with the
key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of
the vehicle. To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with your key, insert the key and turn it toward the rear
of the vehicle.
To unlock either manual
locking front door from the
inside, pull back on the
manual lever. To lock
either front door from the
inside, push the manual
lever forward.

Power Door Locks

Delayed Locking
The power door lock switch
is located on the driver’s
and front passenger’s
doors next to the door
handle.

With the delayed locking feature, the doors will not lock
immediately when locking the doors using the power door
lock switch or when LOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed while any door is open. Instead,
three chimes will be heard to indicate that the delayed
locking feature is in operation. Five seconds after all
doors are closed, the doors will lock automatically.
If the ignition is in ON or ACCESSORY, this feature will
not lock the doors.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-66 to program the delayed locking feature.

Press the front of the switch to lock all doors, or press
the back of the switch to unlock all doors.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
Instead, each rear door has a manual lever that
works only that door’s lock.
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,
the power door lock switch may cause the system
to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15 for
more information.

2-9

Programmable Automatic Door
Locks

2. On the inside of the rear
door will be a lock.
Push the lever up to
engage the safety lock.

All of the doors will automatically lock when all doors
are closed, the engine is running and the shift lever
is shifted out of PARK (P). All of the doors will
automatically unlock when the shift lever is shifted into
PARK (P).
With the automatic door lock feature, you can still lock
or unlock the doors at any time, either manually, with the
power door lock switches or by pressing LOCK on the
remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry System Operation on page 2-6 for more
information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-66 to program the automatic door lock feature.

Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks
that help prevent passengers from opening the rear
doors on your vehicle from the inside. To use one
of these locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.

2-10

3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other rear
door lock.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when this feature is in use. If you
want to open the rear door when the security lock is on,
unlock the door from the inside and then open the
door from the outside.

Canceling the Rear Door Security
Locks
1. Unlock and open the rear door from the outside.
2. Push the lever down to disengage the safety lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other rear
door lock.
The rear door locks will now work normally.

Lockout Protection
The lockout protection feature may prevent you from
locking your key in your vehicle. Pressing the power
door lock switch will lock all doors, then unlock
the driver’s door, if the key is in the ignition when a door
is opened.
If you leave the key in your vehicle but not in the
ignition or if you use the manual door lock, you could
still lock the key in the vehicle. Always remember to take
the key with you.

Liftgate

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the liftgate open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-28.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-29.

2-11

Liftgate Release

To open the liftgate using the touchpad, do the following:
1. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
2. Unlock all of the doors.
3. Lift up on the liftgate handle.
If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry transmitter,
you may unlock the liftgate by pressing the REAR button
on the transmitter, then open the liftgate manually by
lifting up on the liftgate handle. Pressing REAR while the
Content Theft-Deterrent is active allows you to open
the liftgate while all other doors remain locked.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15

Liftgate Handle
Your vehicle is equipped with a liftgate release touchpad,
located on the inner side of the liftgate handle.

2-12

Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.

2-13

Power Windows

The driver’s power window switch has two down
positions. Push the rear of the switch to the first position
to lower the window normally.
Press the rear of any passenger window switch and that
window will open. Press the front of any switch to
close the window.

Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch also has an express-down
feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. To activate
the express-down feature, push the rear of the driver’s
window switch to the second position, then release
it. The window will lower completely.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front
of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold
the front of the switch.
Switches on the driver’s door armrest control each of
the windows when the ignition is in ON, ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-21 for
more information. In addition, each passenger’s door
has a window switch.

2-14

Window Lock Out

Theft-Deterrent Systems

The driver’s window controls also include a lock-out
switch. Press the right side of the WDO LOCK switch to
stop rear passengers from lowering their window.
The driver can still control all of the windows with the
lock on. Press the other side of the WDO LOCK switch
for normal window operation.

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.

Sun Visors

Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm system.

To block out glare you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side. There may be an extension on
the inboard side of the sun visors. Pull the extension
out to block out glare.

Content Theft-Deterrent
A security light, located on
top of the instrument panel
will flash slowly to let
you know that the system
has been armed.

Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the
vanity mirror.

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the
vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when you open
the cover.

While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power
door lock switch.

2-15

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle without using the optional remote
keyless entry transmitter or the key, or tries to turn the
ignition on without using the correct key. The horn
will sound and the headlamps and parking lamps will
flash any time the alarm sounds.
When the content theft-deterrent system is armed, the
liftgate may be opened by pressing the REAR button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm will
go into standby mode. Once the liftgate is closed, the
alarm will be armed. See “Liftgate Release” under
Liftgate on page 2-11 for more information on how to
open the liftgate.

Arming with the Power Lock Switch
The content theft-deterrent alarm system will arm when
you use either power door lock switch to lock the doors
while any door or the liftgate is open and the key is
removed from the ignition. The security light, located on
top of the instrument panel, will start flashing when the
system is armed.
Within five seconds, after the security light begins to
flash, any door can be manually unlocked and opened,
without sounding the alarm. A door unlocked manually
will remain unlocked until locked again.

2-16

Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm when you press LOCK once
on your remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the
doors. The alarm system light will come on for
30 seconds and then start flashing to let you know the
system is armed.
Within the 30 second delay after the security light
comes on, and an additional five seconds after the light
begins to flash, any door can be manually unlocked
and opened, without sounding the alarm.
If LOCK is pressed on your remote keyless entry
transmitter twice within five seconds, any door can be
manually unlocked and opened within five seconds after
the security light begins to flash, without sounding the
alarm. A door unlocked manually will remain unlocked
until locked again.

Disarming with Your Key

PASS-Key® III

Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key
to unlock the driver’s door. The security light will
stop flashing to let you know the system is no longer
armed.

Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you press UNLOCK
on your remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the
doors. The security light, on top of the instrument panel,
will stop flashing to let you know the system is no
longer armed.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

2-17

PASS-Key® III Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key® III
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III is a passive
theft deterrent system.
This means you don’t have
to do anything different
to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you
insert or remove the key
from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone
using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
If the SECURITY message is shown on the Message
Center when trying to start the vehicle, the key may
have a damaged transponder. See PASS-Key®
III Security Message on page 3-57. Turn the ignition off
and try to start the vehicle again.
2-18

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be
undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-105. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III to have a new
key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to program
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
10 additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
This procedure is for programming additional keys only. If
all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not
operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III to have keys made and
programmed to the system.
See your dealer who can service PASS-Key® III to get a
new key blank that is a cut exactly as the ignition key
that operates the system.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key® III to
have new keys made. To program additional keys you
will need two current driver’s keys (black in color).
You must add a step to the following procedure. After
Step 3 repeat Steps 1 through 3 with the second current
driver’s key. Then continue with Step 4.

To program the new PK3® key do the following:
1. Verify the new key has PK3® stamped on it.
2. Insert the original key in the ignition and start the
engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer
for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The SECURITY message will turn off once the key
has been programmed. It may not be apparent that
the SECURITY message went on due to how
quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY message
comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your
engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see your
dealer who can service PASS-Key® III to have a
new key made.

Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:

• If you have all-wheel drive, keep your speed
at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first
500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your
new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-38 for more information.

2-19

Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition, you can turn it to four
different positions.

B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers while the
engine is off. This position will also allow you to turn
off the engine. Use ACCESSORY if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off, for example,
if your vehicle is being pushed or towed.
C (ON): This is the position that the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the key.
The switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But
even when the engine is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical power accessories, and to
display some instrument panel warning lights.
D (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON for normal driving.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can
remove the key. This position locks the ignition
and transaxle.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

2-20

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With RAP, the power windows, the audio system,
the sunroof and the automatic level control will continue
to work for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned to OFF or until one of the doors is opened.

Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine warms up.

2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down
while you turn the key to START. Do this until the
engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of the key.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still will not start, or starts briefly but then stops
again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on the
temperature. When the engine starts, release the
key and the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.

2-21

Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In
very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.

2-22

Automatic Transaxle Operation

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever — push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of
Park (P) on page 2-28 for more information.

{CAUTION:
Maximum engine speed is limited when you are in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This gear position locks your front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You must fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition key is in ON. As you step on the brake
pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the
solenoid of the system. This ensures that the system
is operating properly.

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-27. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.

2-23

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-30.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.

2-24

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transaxle. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds
until then.

Warm-Up Shift
Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle
designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside
temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder. You may notice
that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed until
the engine is warmed up. This is a normal condition
designed to provide heat to the passenger compartment
and defrost the windows more quickly.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):

• When driving on hilly, winding roads
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears

• When going down a steep hill
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have
your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you can
use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than
35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will
not downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slow enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

2-25

All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s driving
power is sent to all four wheels for extra traction
when needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It
is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon
acceleration when driving in slippery conditions. This is
normal and is an indication that the all-wheel drive
system is functioning properly.

Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located under the
instrument panel on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.

2-26

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push down on the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-44.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot while you push down on
the parking brake pedal with your left foot. When you
lift your left foot from the parking brake pedal, it will pop
up to the released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).

2-27

Torque Lock

Shifting Out of Park (P)

If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out
how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.

Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control
system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P) when the
ignition is in the OFF position. In addition, you must fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P), when the ignition is in the ON position. See
Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-23.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.

2-28

Parking Over Things That Burn

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.

You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-29

Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-29.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-26.

2-30

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-38.

Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have a rearview mirror that can be
adjusted for day or night driving. Push or pull the tab at
the bottom of the mirror to adjust it for day or night
conditions.

Outside Power Mirror
The power mirror controls
are located on the driver’s
door armrest.

The mirror’s two outer buttons operate the lamps on the
bottom of the mirror.
The mirror may have a passenger airbag indicator. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-77 for more
information.
To choose either the left or right outside mirror, press
the selector switch. Press any of the four arrows located
on the control pad to move the mirrors in the desired
direction.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.

2-31

Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If the vehicle has this feature, it can be helpful when
parallel parking. The passenger’s outside rearview mirror
will tilt towards the curb when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R) and return to its previous position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). If
further adjustment is needed, the power mirror controls
can be used. See Outside Power Mirror on page 2-31.
Also see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-66
for information on how to turn this feature on and off.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.

2-32

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things appear farther
away than they really are.

Outside Heated Mirrors
If the vehicle has this feature, the outside rearview
mirrors are heated when the rear window defogger is
turned on. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Climate
Control System on page 3-28, Dual Climate Control
System on page 3-30, or Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-33.

OnStar® System
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.

OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can
extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.

Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

2-33

OnStar® Personal Calling

HomeLink® Transmitter

As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is available if your hand-held cell phone is
lost, forgotten, or has a low battery. It is a hands-free
wireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in
the vehicle’s glove box or visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com; or speak with an OnStar®
advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or by calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment and more. You are also able
to listen and reply to your E-mail through your vehicle’s
audio system. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.

HomeLink, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand−held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink information can be found on the internet
at www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

2-34

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.

Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.

2-35

Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.

2-36

5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You do
not want to repeat step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming.

Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The indicator light
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with
Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink® ” to complete.

Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.

2-37

Erasing HomeLink® Buttons

Resetting Defaults

To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:

To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under
“Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do
not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.
2-38

1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.

Storage Areas
Glove Box
If the glove box has a lock, put your key into the lock
and turn the key counterclockwise. To open the
glove box, pull the latch release.
The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door
from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door
is partway open, then pull the door down if you need
it fully opened.
To close the glove box, the door must be pushed up
past the detent. To lock the glove box, put your key into
the lock and turn the key clockwise.

Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders located in the floor console.
The cupholders have liners that remove for larger
beverage items. Remove the liners by lifting them out.
Your vehicle has cupholders located in the rear seat
armrests if it has a split folding rear seat. If your vehicle
has captain’s chairs, there are cupholders on the
sides of the seats. If your vehicle has a stowable seat,
there are cupholders in the center of the seat.

If your vehicle has the OnStar® System, the OnStar®
buttons will replace the storage compartment. See
OnStar® System on page 2-33 for more information.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the mini console contains
the HomeLink® Transmitter buttons and the OnStar®
buttons.

Storage Compartment
To open the storage compartment located at the front of
the overhead console, press the release latch forward.
Then pull the compartment down to the full open position.

Cell Phone Storage Area

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

Your vehicle has a cell phone storage compartment
located on the floor console storage closest to the
driver’s seat. Lift the lid to use the storage compartment.
The compartment has an accessory power outlet for
charging the cell phone.

To open the sunglasses storage compartment in the
overhead console, press the release button. Then pull
the compartment down to the full open position.

Overhead Console

The floor console storage area contains two cupholders,
an ashtray, and a cellular phone storage compartment
with a cigarette lighter/accessory power outlet.

If your vehicle has an overhead console, it may contain
a storage compartment, a sunglasses storage
compartment, and HomeLink® Transmitter buttons.
See HomeLink® Transmitter on page 2-34 for more
information.

Floor Console Storage Area

Below the floor console storage, there is another
storage area with two integrated convenience nets.

2-39

Front Armrest Storage Area
Your vehicle has a front armrest storage compartment
which contains two storage compartments.
To unlock the front armrest storage compartment, put
your key into the lock and turn the key counterclockwise.
To open the armrest, squeeze the lever while lifting
the top to open it.
To close the armrest, push the lid down until you hear a
click. To lock the armrest, put your key into the lock
and turn the key clockwise.

Rear Storage Area
There are four small storage compartments in the rear
of your vehicle. One is on the passenger’s side, two
are on the driver’s side and one is on the floor by the
tailgate. To remove the covers, lift up on the tabs. If your
vehicle has the 10-speaker system, the compartment
on the passenger’s side and the long compartment
on the driver’s side will be equipped with speakers.

2-40

Roof Rack System

{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.

If you have the luggage carrier with crossrails you can
load things on top of your vehicle. If you do load
things on the top of your vehicle, you must load them
on the luggage carrier crossrails. Some vehicles may not
have the crossrails.
Notice: Damage may be caused to the roof of your
vehicle if anything is placed directly on the roof.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as
far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a
proper size and weight, put it on the slats and distribute
the weight evenly. Then slide the crossrail, if equipped,
up against the rear of the load to keep it from moving.
You can then tie it down. Cargo containers must
be loaded on the crossrails only.

2-41

Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-31.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage
carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
Loading things onto the luggage carrier can interfere
with the performance of your XM™ Satellite Radio
System, if equipped..

To adjust the crossrail(s), the sunroof stop (A), if
equipped, must be removed.
To remove the sunroof stop, do the following:
1. Find the tool (B) located in a bag in the glove box
labeled TOOL KIT-ACSRY.
2. Use the tool to remove the screw located in the
side rail assembly in front of the front crossrail.
3. Repeat for the other side.
Your luggage carrier has release levers within the end
of each crossrail support.

2-42

4. Put the tool and the screws back in the plastic bag
in the glove box.

To adjust the crossrails, lift the release levers on each
side to unlock them. Slide the crossrails forward or
backward, as needed, to accommodate loads of
various sizes.
After repositioning the crossrails, push the release lever
down. This will lock the crossrails in place.
Notice: Opening the sunroof when the luggage
rack crossrails are not in the full-rear position could
cause damage to the sunroof or luggage rack.
Verify the luggage rack crossrails are in the full-rear
position before opening the sunroof.
When you are done using the crossrails you must
replace the sunroof stop.
To replace the sunroof stop, do the following:
1. Put the crossrails in the full rear position.
2. Using the tool, put the screws back into each side
rail assembly. Make sure the screws are in the first
hole in front of the crossrail.

Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
convenience net is designed to help keep small loads,
like grocery bags, from falling over. Install the
convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, just inside
the liftgate/tailgate opening.
Attach both the upper and lower hooks to the loops on
either side of the liftgate opening. The label on the
net should be in the upper left corner.
The convenience net has a maximum capacity of
100 lbs (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier
loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle,
as far forward as you can.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take down
the rear convenience net to extend its life and retain
its elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. Store
the net in one of the storage compartments.

Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Remove the cover
from its pouch and place the loops found on each
corner of the cover, over the four pegs in each corner of
the rear if the vehicle. When it is not in use, fold up
the cover and return it to the pouch.

2-43

Rear Convenience Center

{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
item properly.
Your vehicle may have a rear convenience center. The
rear convenience center can be used to organize
and store items in your vehicle.
The extended rear convenience center, without the
optional third row stowable seat, has a forward bin and
rear bin. The rear convenience center, with the optional
third row stowable seat, contains one storage bin.
To use the convenience center, remove the carpeted
mat and lift the handle(s) on the top of the lid to
open the storage bin.
The extended rear convenience center has a maximum
weight capacity of 400 lbs (181.6 kg) on top.
The shorter rear convenience center that comes with
the optional third row stowable seat has a maximum
weight capacity of 100 lbs (45.4 kg) on top.
2-44

Removing the Extended Rear
Convenience Center
1. Make sure that all items have been removed from the
top and the inside of the rear convenience center.
2. Remove the carpeted mat from the vehicle.
3. Lift the handle(s) on the top of the lid to open the
rear storage bin. The center lid will also need to be
opened.
4. Remove the two nuts from inside the rear storage
bin. The nuts are located in the bottom of the bin.
5. Lift the rear storage bin and remove it from the rear
of the vehicle.
6. Remove the two nuts inside the forward storage
bin. These nuts are located along the bottom of
the center divider wall.
7. Lift the forward storage bin and remove it from the
rear of the vehicle.

Reinstalling the Extended Rear
Convenience Center
1. Make sure that all items have been removed from
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the carpeted mat from the vehicle.

5. Lift the rear bin into the back of the vehicle. Place
the rear bin over the center T-shaped wall on the
forward bin. Push down to secure. Align the rear bin
over the rear mounting bolts.
6. Put the nuts back onto the mounting bolts and
tighten.
3. Lift the forward bin into the back of the vehicle.
Place the mounting brackets onto the forward
mounting bolts on the floor of the vehicle.

7. Push and pull on the rear storage system to make
sure that it is locked into place properly.

4. Put the nuts back onto the mounting bolts and
tighten.

2-45

Removing the Rear Convenience
Center on Vehicles with the Third Row
Stowable Seat

Reinstalling the Rear Convenience
Center on Vehicles with the Third Row
Stowable Seat

1. Make sure that all items have been removed from
the top and the inside of the rear convenience
center.

1. Make sure that all items have been removed from
the rear of the vehicle.

2. Lift the handle(s) on the top of the lid to open the
storage bin.
3. Remove the two nuts from inside the storage bin.
The nuts are located in the bottom of the bin.
If you are only removing the convenience center
and not the stowable seat, you must replace these
nuts once the bin is removed to secure the seat.
4. Lift the storage bin and remove it from the rear of
the vehicle.

2. Lift the bin into the back of the vehicle. Align the bin
over the rear mounting bolts.
3. Put the nuts back onto the mounting bolts and
tighten.
4. Push and pull on the rear storage system to make
sure that it is locked into place properly.
2-46

Sunroof
If the vehicle has a
sunroof, the switch to
operate it is located on the
headliner, between the
sun visors.

Press and release the rear of the switch a second time to
express-open the sunroof. The sunshade will open with
the sunroof. Press the switch in either direction to stop it
from moving. If the rear of the switch is pressed and held,
the express-open operation will be overridden.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
switch.

Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat

The sunroof switch will only work when the ignition is
ON or when the ignition is OFF and retained accessory
power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-21.
Notice: Opening the sunroof when the luggage
rack crossrails are not in the full-rear position could
cause damage to the sunroof or luggage rack.
Verify the luggage rack crossrails are in the full-rear
position before opening the sunroof.
Press the rear of the switch to open the sunroof to the
vent position. The sunshade must be opened by hand.

If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the driver’s door
panel and are used to
store and recall the driver’s
seat position and the
outside rearview mirror
position.

The settings for these features can be personalized for
both driver 1 and driver 2. Driver 1 and driver 2
correspond to the memory buttons labeled 1 and 2 on
the driver’s door.
2-47

To store the memory settings, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat and the outside rearview
mirrors to the position you would like for driving.
2. Press and hold memory button 1 for more than
three seconds.
A double beep will sound when the memory seat and
mirror position have been stored.
To store the seat and outside rearview mirror positions
for a second driver, follow the previous steps, but
press button 2 instead.
To recall your stored positions, your vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press and release the memory button (1 or 2)
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat and the outside rearview mirrors will move to the
position previously stored for the identified driver.
You will hear one beep.

2-48

To store an exit position for each driver, do the following:
1. Move the seat to the desired exit position.
2. Hold the button with the exit symbol, located below
the memory buttons, for more than three seconds.
The exit position stored will be for the most recently
selected driving position (1 or 2). A double beep
will sound when the exit position is stored.
To use the exit feature, your vehicle must be in PARK (P).
Press and release the button with the exit symbol and the
seat will move to the exit position stored for the most
recently selected driver. You will hear one beep.
To stop recall movement of the seat at any time, press
one of the three memory buttons or one of the power seat
controls located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Center (DIC), you can use it to program certain functions
of the memory seats. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-66.

Section 3

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16
Interior Lamps Control ...................................3-16
Headlamp Exit Delay .....................................3-17
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-17
Delayed Lighting ...........................................3-18
Exit Lighting .................................................3-18
Perimeter Lighting .........................................3-19
Front Reading Lamps ....................................3-19
Rear Reading Lamps ....................................3-19
Cargo Lamp .................................................3-19

Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-20
Instrument Panel Switchbank ..........................3-20
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-21
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-24
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-26
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-27
Climate Controls ............................................3-28
Climate Control System .................................3-28
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-30
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-33
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-36
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-37
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-38
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-39
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-39
Tachometer .................................................3-40
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-41
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-41
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-42
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-44
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-45
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-45
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-46
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-46
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-49
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-50
3-1

Section 3

Instrument Panel

Message Center .............................................3-51
Passenger Seatbelt Reminder Message ...........3-51
Service Traction System Warning Message ......3-51
Traction Active Message ................................3-52
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Message ..................................................3-52
Charging System Indicator Message ................3-53
Reduced Engine Power Message ....................3-53
Low Oil Pressure Message ............................3-54
Low Engine Oil Level Message .......................3-55
Change Engine Oil Message ..........................3-55
Low Tire Message ........................................3-56
Door Ajar Warning Message ...........................3-56
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message ..................3-56
Check Gas Cap Message ..............................3-57
PASS-Key® III Security Message ....................3-57
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message .......3-57
Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ...............3-58
Low Fuel Warning Message ...........................3-58
Low Brake Fluid Warning Message .................3-59
Service Vehicle Soon Message .......................3-59
Program Mode Message ................................3-60
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery Low
Warning Message ......................................3-60

3-2

Parking Lamp Warning Message .....................3-61
Highbeam Out Warning Message ....................3-61
Driver Information Center (DIC) .........................3-62
DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-64
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-66
Audio System(s) .............................................3-75
Setting the Time ...........................................3-76
Radio with CD ..............................................3-76
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-87
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................3-100
Rear Seat Entertainment System ...................3-115
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-130
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-130
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-132
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-133
Radio Reception .........................................3-134
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-134
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-135
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-135
Integrated Windshield Antenna ......................3-135
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-135

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Exterior/Interior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-14 and Interior Lamps on page 3-16.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-38.
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation
on page 2-23.
F. Instrument Panel Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 3-36.
G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-75.
H. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-133.
I. Head-Up Display Switch and Driver Information
Center (DIC) Controls (If Equipped). See Head-Up
Display (HUD) on page 3-21 and DIC Controls
and Displays on page 3-64.

J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
K. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
L. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on
page 3-28, Dual Climate Control System on
page 3-30 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System
on page 3-33.
M. Instrument Panel Switchbank. See Instrument Panel
Switchbank on page 3-20.
N. Front Armrest Storage. See Front Armrest Storage
Area on page 2-40.
O. Ashtray/Cigarette Lighter/Accessory Power
Outlet/Cell Phone Storage/Cupholders. See Ashtrays
and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-27, Accessory
Power Outlets on page 3-26, Cell Phone Storage
Area on page 2-39, Floor Console Storage Area on
page 2-39 and Cupholder(s) on page 2-39.
P. Floor Console Fuse Block. See Floor Console Fuse
Block on page 5-105.
Q. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-38.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers

Horn

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.

The hazard warning flasher
button is located on top of
the steering column.

Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.

Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.

3-6

To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel
to a comfortable position
and release the lever
to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

• L PUSH Windshield Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 3-9.

• CRUISE I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-10.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster and the HUD
display will flash in the
direction of the turn or lane
change.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.
• WIPER N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield
Wipers on page 3-9.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.

3-7

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-105.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high, push
the turn signal lever away from you, then release it. To
change the headlamps from high to low, pull the
lever toward you.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
and the HUD display (if
equipped), will also be on.

If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a
normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned
out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly
to make sure they are working.

Turn Signal On Chime
If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to
turn it off.

Flash-to-Pass

If you need to leave the signal on for more than
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it
back on.

When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward you
to momentarily turn on the high beams. This will
signal that you are going to pass. When you release the
lever, they will turn off.

3-8

Windshield Wipers
WIPER N: Turn the band marked WIPER to control
the windshield wipers.
MIST: For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST.
Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The
wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles,
hold the band on MIST longer.
Delay: For delayed wiping cycles, you can set the
wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes.
This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn
the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LO,
the shorter the delay time.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Windshield Washer
L PUSH:

To wash your windshield, press and hold
the paddle with the windshield washer symbol. The
washers and wipers will operate. When you release the
paddle, the washers will stop, and the wipers will
continue to operate for two cycles, unless your wipers
were already on. In that case, the wipers will resume the
wiper speed you selected earlier.

LO: For steady wiping cycles at low speed, turn the
band away from you to the LO position.

{CAUTION:

HI: For high-speed wiping, turn the band away from
you to the HI position.

In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.

OFF: To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do
become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

3-9

Rear Window Washer/Wiper
The rear window
washer/wiper switch is
located in the instrument
panel switchbank. See
Instrument Panel
Switchbank on page 3-20.

= (Rear Wiper/Washer To wash and wipe the rear
window, press the washer symbol on the bottom of the
switch. Washer fluid will spray as long as the switch is
held in. When the switch is released, the wiper will
continue to cycle three more times. There is only one
washer fluid reservoir for the front and rear windshield
wipers. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-37.
To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is already
on, press the bottom of the switch. Press the top of
the switch to continue the intermittent wiper cycle after
the washing cycle is completed.

Cruise Control
Z (Rear Intermittent Wiper) Press the wiper symbol on
the top of the switch to turn on the intermittent wiper. To
turn off the wiper, gently press the bottom of the switch.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
disengages.

3-10

The cruise controls are
located on the end of the
turn signal/multifunction
lever.

{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.

ON: Move the switch to this position to turn the cruise
control system on.
R/A: Move the switch to this position to resume a set
speed or to accelerate.
SET: Press this button, located at the end of the lever,
to set a speed.
OFF: This position turns the cruise control system off
and cancels memory of a set speed.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-10. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.

3-11

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever, to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

3-12

Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset
it. Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
Resume/Accelerate (R/A) briefly.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep going
faster until you release the switch or apply the brake.
So unless you want to go faster, do not hold the switch
at R/A.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to increase speed while using
cruise control:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You will now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want,
and then release the switch. To increase your speed
in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A
briefly and then release it. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will work whether or not you have
set an initial cruise control speed.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce speed while using cruise
control:

• Press the SET button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET
button briefly. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control

Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise control switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

3-13

Exterior Lamps

5 (Headlamps):
The control on the left side
of the steering column
operates the exterior
lamps.

Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.

Lamps on Reminder
If the driver’s door is opened and you turn the ignition to
OFF while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a
warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

The exterior lamp control has three positions:
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp Control/Off): Turning
the control to this position will activate the automatic
headlamps when it is dark enough outside and turn off
all lamps and lights during the day except for the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).

< (Parking Lamps):

Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps together with the
following:

• Taillamps
• Instrument Panel Lights

3-14

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it is not covered. The DRL
system will make your reduced intensity high-beam
headlamps come on in daylight when the following
conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).

When the DRL are on, only your reduced intensity
high-beam headlamps will be on. Your instrument panel
will not be lit up.
When it is dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will
come on automatically. When it is bright enough
outside, the exterior lamps will go out and the DRL will
turn on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps
any time you need to.

Fog Lamps
The fog lamp button is
located on the exterior
lamp control.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp System
When the exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO, and
it is dark enough outside, the headlamps and parking
lamps will, automatically, come on.
The lamps will also come on automatically if the
following conditions are met:

• The ignition is in ON.
• The parking brake is released.

Press the FOG PUSH button to turn the fog lamps on.
The FOG light, located next to the fog lamp button,
will come on to indicate when the fog lamps are on. To
turn off the fog lamps, press the fog lamp button or
turn the ignition off.
If you turn on the fog lamps while the DRL are on, the
parking lamps will turn on automatically.
Your fog lamps will go off when you switch to high
beams. When you return to low beam, the fog lamps
will come back on. Using your high beams in fog is not
recommended.

3-15

Interior Lamps
The interior lamps can be controlled, or automatically
turn on or off under certain conditions. They are
explained in the following text.

Instrument Panel Brightness

Interior Lamps Control
The interior lamp control is
located to the left of the
steering column, below the
exterior lamp control.

This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights. The knob for this feature is located on the
interior lamps control. Press the knob to extend it.
Turn the knob to adjust the instrument panel brightness.
Press the knob in when not in use.
Turn the interior lamp control to one of the following
positions:
OFF: This position turns the interior lamps off.
DOOR: This position turns on the interior lamps when
any door is opened and when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition.
ON: This position turns the interior lamps on.

3-16

Headlamp Exit Delay

Entry Lighting

If your vehicle has headlamp exit delay, it will keep the
headlamps and parking lamps on at night for
30 seconds if the following conditions are met:

If your vehicle has entry lighting, the interior of your
vehicle will illuminate for 25 seconds so you can
see inside your vehicle before you enter. To activate
entry lighting, do one of the following:

• The ignition is turned to OFF.
• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position.
• LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.

• It is dark enough outside.

• Unlock a door using the key when the interior lamp
control is in the DOOR position, and when the
ignition is in OFF.

• Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter when the interior lamp control is in the
DOOR position, and when the ignition is in OFF.

After 30 seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps will
turn off.

After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out.

The lamps will turn off before the 30 seconds if the
following conditions are met:

The lamps will turn off before 25 seconds if you do one
of the following:

• The ignition is turned to ON.
• The exterior lamp control is turned out of the AUTO
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-66 to program the headlamp exit delay feature.

• Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.

• Press the front of the power door lock switch.
• Turn the ignition to ON.
When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled. The
interior lamps will stay on while any door or the liftgate is
open, and fade out when all the doors are closed.

3-17

Delayed Lighting

Exit Lighting

If your vehicle has delayed lighting, it will continue to
illuminate the interior for 25 seconds after all doors have
been closed. The lamps will continue to illuminate
when the following conditions are met:

If your vehicle is equipped with exit lighting, the interior
lamps will come on for about 30 seconds whenever
you remove the key from the ignition if the following
conditions are met:

• A door is opened then closed.
• The interior lamp control is in the DOOR position.
• The ignition is in OFF.
After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out.
The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if you do
one of the following:

• Turn the ignition to ON.
• Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.

• Press the front of the power door lock switch.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you can program this feature on or
off. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-66.

3-18

•
•
•
•

The vehicle is in PARK (P).
The key is out of the ignition.
The interior lamp control is in the DOOR position.
All of the doors are closed.

After 30 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out.
The interior lamps will fade out before 30 seconds if you
do one of the following:

• Turn the ignition to ON.
• Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.

Perimeter Lighting

Front Reading Lamps

If your vehicle has perimeter lighting, it will turn on the
headlamps and parking lamps for 25 seconds when
the following conditions are met:

There are two reading lamps located on the rearview
mirror.

• The ignition is turned to OFF.
• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position.
• UNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.

• It is dark enough outside.
After 25 seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps will
turn off.
The lamps will turn off before the 25 seconds if you do
one of the following:

• Turn the ignition to ON.
• Turn the exterior lamp control out of the AUTO
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you can program this feature on or
off. See “Lock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-66.

To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the button
located next to each lamp. These lamps will come
on each time you open the doors, if the interior lamp
control is in the ON or DOOR position.

Rear Reading Lamps
There are two reading lamps with coat hooks above the
rear doors.
To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the lens of
the lamp.

Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located in the rear of the vehicle,
above the liftgate opening. It comes on automatically
each time you open the doors, if the interior lamp control
is in the DOOR position.
There are two reading lamps located on the cargo lamp.
To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp.

3-19

Battery Run-Down Protection

Instrument Panel Switchbank

Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the
interior or exterior lamps on. If the interior lamps are
left on while the ignition is in OFF, they will automatically
turn off after 10 minutes. If the exterior lamps are left
on while the ignition is in OFF with all doors and
the liftgate closed, they will automatically turn off after
10 minutes.

There is an instrument panel switchbank located below
the comfort controls. It contains switches or blanks
that will vary with the options that are on your vehicle.

If your vehicle has less than 14 miles (24 km) on the
odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after
only three minutes.
If the interior lamps are turned off as a result of the
battery saver feature, they may be turned back on by
turning the interior lamp control to OFF and then back to
ON. The battery saver will not turn the interior lamps
off automatically after doing this. They will have to
be turned off manually.

3-20

The switches you may have are:

• Rear Window Wiper/Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 3-9.

• Traction Disable. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10.

• Park Aid Disable. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) on page 3-24.

• Heated Seats. See Heated Seats on page 1-5.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

The HUD will display the following lights and messages
when they appear on the instrument panel cluster:

• Turn Signal Indicators. See Turn

{CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD), it can
show the speedometer reading in English or metric. The
current audio system information, as well as Rear
Seat Entertainment system information, may also be
displayed and will appear as an image focused out
toward the front of your vehicle.
The HUD is capable of displaying English or French.
See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-64 to change
the display from English to metric.

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

• High-Beam Indicator. See Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

• Low-Fuel Warning Message. See Low Fuel Warning
Message on page 3-58.
The Head-Up Display also displays a CHECK GAGES
message. The following messages could appear on
the instrument panel cluster when CHECK GAGES
appears:

• Engine Coolant Temperature Warning. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Message on
page 3-52.

• Low Oil Pressure. See Low Oil Pressure Message
on page 3-54.

• Charging System Indicator. See Charging System
Indicator Message on page 3-53.

• Low Brake Fluid Warning. See Low Brake Fluid
Warning Message on page 3-59.

3-21

The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.

Under warning conditions, the CHECK GAGES message
will illuminate in the HUD. Look at the instrument
panel cluster for more information.
Notice: If you try to use the HUD image as a
parking aid, you may misjudge the distance and
damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image as
a parking aid.

3-22

When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will
always be displayed. The current audio system
information will only be displayed for three seconds after
the radio, tape or CD track status changes. This will
happen whenever one of the radio controls is pressed,
either on the radio or on the audio steering wheel
controls, if equipped.

To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the
following:
1. Start your engine and turn the dimmer knob to the
desired HUD image brightness.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by
the ambient light conditions in the direction your
vehicle is facing and where you have the HUD
dimmer knob set. If you are facing a dark object or a
heavily shaded area, your HUD may anticipate that
you are entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat. If you change your seat
position, you may have to readjust your HUD.

When you first start the vehicle the display will show
BUICK and the Buick logo for a few seconds. If it is cold
outside, this display may stay on for up to a minute.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the
cleaner could leak into the unit.
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image,
check to see if one of the following conditions exist:

3. Press the UP or DN buttons until the HUD image is
easy to see and then press the DN button until the
HUD image is as low as possible, but remains
in full view straight ahead near the front bumper.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.

•
•
•
•

4. To turn the image off, turn the dimmer knob
counterclockwise until it stops.

• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on

If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you may
need to adjust the HUD brightness again using
the dimmer knob. Polarized sunglasses could make the
HUD image harder to see.

The HUD unit is covered
The HUD dimmer knob is adjusted incorrectly
The HUD image is not adjusted to the proper height
Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is
facing, is low
page 5-105.

If you ever have to have your windshield replaced, be
sure to get one that is designed for the HUD or your
HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.

3-23

Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system is
designed to help you park, while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). It operates only at very low speeds, less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parking
easier and to help you avoid colliding with objects such as
parked vehicles. The URPA system can detect objects up
to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how
close these objects are from your rear bumper.

Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while
parking. And, the system does not detect
objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)
behind the vehicle.

Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic sensors located at
the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to the
object. The URPA display is located inside the vehicle,
near the rear window. It has three color-coded lights used
to provide distance and system information to the driver.

3-24

So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.

URPA can be turned off by
pressing the rear park aid
disable switch located
in the instrument panel
switchbank. When
the system is disabled, an
indicator light will glow
on the switch. You will not
see any lights on the
rear display if the switch is
in the off position.

How the System Works
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). When
the system turns on, the three lights on the display
will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let you know
that the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h),
the red light will flash to remind you that the system
does not work at speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
Description

English

Metric

5 ft

1.5 m

amber/amber lights

40 in

1.0 m

amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime

20 in

0.5 m

1 ft

0.3 m

amber light

amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime

A chime will sound the first time an object is detected
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level.
In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object, it
must be within detection range behind the vehicle.

3-25

When the System Does Not Seem to Work
Properly
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice, and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air
brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red,
see your dealer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
liftgate during your last drive cycle, the light may
also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever
in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward
at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions
behind the vehicle.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-98.

3-26

Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in electrical
equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio.
There is one front power outlet/cigarette lighter located on
the floor console in the cell phone storage compartment.
There are also two rear power outlets. One is located in
the rear of the floor console below the vents. The
other is located in the rear of the vehicle on the driver’s
side behind the access door.
Pull the cover down to use an accessory power outlet.
When not in use, always cover the accessory power
outlets with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlets.

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.

The cigarette lighter is located on the floor console in
the cell phone storage compartment closest to the
driver’s seat. Lift the lid to expose the cigarette lighter.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.

The ashtray is located on the floor console closest to
the instrument panel. Lift the lid to expose the ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, lift it up.

To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.

3-27

Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.

) (Bi-Level):

This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining
air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor):

This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the
vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of
objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of
the vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” later in this section.

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan. The fan must be
turned on for the air conditioning compressor to operate.
Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent):

This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.

3-28

@ (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or help heat or
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this
button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. When the
button is pressed, an indicator light will come on. The
air-conditioning compressor also comes on. The
recirculation mode can be used with vent and bi-level
modes, but it cannot be used with floor, defog, defrost or
outside air modes.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the air
temperature inside your vehicle.

# A/C (Air Conditioning):

Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to
let you know that air conditioning is activated.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity,
or moisture, condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate controls system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield
and the floor outlets. When you select this mode,
the system turns off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
0 (Defrost):

Pressing this button directs most of the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets, with
some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, the
system will automatically turn off recirculation and run the
air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot
be selected while in the defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-29

Rear Window Defogger

Dual Climate Control System

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.

Your vehicle may have a dual climate control system.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.

< REAR:

Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to
the defogger grid.

Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent):

This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level):

3-30

6 (Floor):

9 (Fan):

Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob counterclockwise until it stops to turn
off the fan. The fan must be turned on for the air
conditioning compressor to operate.

@ (Recirculation):

Temperature Control: Use the driver’s and
passenger’s temperature levers to increase or decrease
the air temperature inside your vehicle.

# A/C (Air Conditioning):

3-31

Defogging and Defrosting

Rear Window Defogger

Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity,
or moisture, condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate controls system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly.

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.

Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.

This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, with some
air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, the system
will automatically turn off recirculation and run the
air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot
be selected while in the defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-32

< REAR:

Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately five
minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.

Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Your vehicle may have the dual automatic climate
control system. With this system you can control the
heating, cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When the driver’s temperature
knob is pressed to select AUTO and the temperature is
set, the system will automatically control the inside
temperature, the air delivery and the fan speed. AUTO
will also appear on the display.
To place the entire system in automatic mode, do the
following:
1. Press the driver’s temperature knob to turn the
system on.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature will
not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. Then, as the air warms,
it will be delivered through the instrument panel
outlets. The length of time needed for warm up will
depend on the outside temperature and the length
of time that has elapsed since your vehicle was
last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature as
necessary.
4. To turn the system off, press the passenger’s knob.

3-33

Manual Operation
MODE: Press this button to manually change the
direction of airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent):

This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.

)(Bi-Level):

This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
the remaining air to the floor outlets and the defroster
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to
the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor):

This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of
the vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free
of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of
the vehicle.
The MODE button can also be used to select defog. For
more information, see “Defogging and Defrosting”
later in this section.

3-34

9 (Fan):

Press this button to increase to decrease
the fan speed; keep pressing the up or down arrow until
the desired fan speed appears on the display.
VENT: Press this button to turn the outside air mode on
or off. When this mode is on, outside air will be
circulated throughout your vehicle. VENT can be used
with all modes, but it cannot be used with the
recirculation mode.

@ (Recirculation):

This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help
heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will
come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes
on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent
and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor,
defog, defrost or outside air modes.
Temperature Control: Use the DRIVER knob to
increase or decrease the air temperature inside your
vehicle. If the front passenger would like the temperature
to be warmer or cooler, use the PASS knob to adjust
the passenger’s temperature.

Air Conditioning: The air-conditioning compressor will
automatically come on when a temperature cooler
than the interior temperature is chosen using the
temperature knobs.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

-(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield and
the floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below
freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defog mode.
Press the defrost button to select defrost.

0(Defrost):

Pressing this button directs most of the air
to the windshield and the side window outlets, with some
air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, the system
will automatically turns off recirculation and run the
air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot
be selected while in the defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-35

Rear Window Defogger

Outlet Adjustment

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.

Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.

< REAR:

Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air

Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.

3-36

inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.

Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works
along with the warning lights and gages. See Message
Center on page 3-51.

3-37

Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically. The
indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.

United States up-level shown, United States base-level and Canadian similar

3-38

Speedometer and Odometer

Trip Odometer

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada). However, a Canadian
odometer will remain in metric units only.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then that will
be done. If it cannot, then it is set at zero and a label
must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may toggle the odometer to
display either miles, available only in the United States,
or kilometers. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-62.

In addition to the standard odometer, the cluster can
also display a trip odometer. The display can be toggled
between the odometer and the trip odometer by
quickly pressing and releasing the trip/reset button
located to the right of the temperature gage. The trip
odometer will continue to keep track of miles or
kilometers driven even if they are not currently
displayed. A Canadian trip odometer will remain in
metric units only. To reset the trip odometer to zero (0),
push and hold the trip/reset button for at least one
and a half seconds, but less than three seconds. The
trip odometer that is showing in the display will be reset.

3-39

Retro-Active Reset
The trip odometer has a feature called retro-active reset.
This feature can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles or kilometers driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if you forget to reset
your trip odometer at the beginning of a trip. To use the
retro-active reset feature, push and hold the trip/reset
button for at least three seconds. The trip odometer will
then display the number of miles or kilometers driven
since the ignition was last turned on and you began
driving. If you use the retro-active reset feature after you
have started the vehicle, but before you begin moving,
the display will show the number of miles or kilometers
you drove during the last ignition cycle. Once you begin
driving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For
example, if you have driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km) since you
started your vehicle, and then activate the retro-active
reset feature, the display will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km).
As you drive, the display will then increase to
5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

3-40

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder Light

Airbag Readiness Light

When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts.

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring, diagnostic module, and safety
belt pretensioners. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 1-67. For more
information on safety belt pretensioners, see Safety Belt
Pretensioners on page 1-42.

The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds. If the
driver’s belt is already
buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.

This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.

3-41

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system or safety belt pretensioners may not work
properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. Your
rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status indicator.

{CAUTION:
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-42

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to ON or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF,
or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a
system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat unless the airbag has been turned off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-77
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light
ever come on together, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. If this
ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person sitting
in the right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 3-41.

3-43

Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-45 and Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-36.

{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.

United States

3-44

Canada

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light

United States

Canada

Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light

United States

Canada

Your vehicle may have an anti-lock brake system
warning light. If it does, the light should come on for a
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
anti-lock brake system warning light stays on longer
than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on
when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needs
service and you don’t have anti-lock brakes.

Your vehicle may have a traction control system
warning light. The traction control system warning light
may come on for the following reasons:

The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

problem that is specifically related to traction control,
the traction control system will turn off and the
warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

• If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC OFF
button located in the instrument panel switchbank
the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn
the system back on, press the button again. The
warning light should go off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-10 for more information.

• If there’s an engine-related and brake system

3-45

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the
United States or Check Engine Light
in Canada

United States

Canada
United States

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is
too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If
you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28.

3-46

Canada

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent
more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:

If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:

•
•
•
•

Reducing vehicle speed
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-47

If the Light Is On Steady

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

3-48

If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.

Highbeam On Light
This light will illuminate
when the headlamp high
beams are in use.

Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or check engine light is on or not
working properly.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.

3-49

Fuel Gage

Here are four things that some owners ask about. All
these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the
gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full,
but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s
capacity to fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
United States

Canada

When the indicator nears empty, you still have a little
fuel left, but you should get more soon.
If your fuel is low, the warning message in the message
center will come on. See Low Fuel Warning Message
on page 3-58.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left when the ignition is on.

3-50

• The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition
is turned off.

Message Center
The message center is located at the top of the
instrument panel cluster in between the tachometer and
speedometer. It gives you important safety and
maintenance facts.

Service Traction System Warning
Message

Passenger Seatbelt Reminder
Message
If your vehicle is equipped
with the passenger
sensing system, this
message reminds the
passenger to buckle their
seatbelt.

This message will come on and a chime will sound
when the ignition is in run and the driver’s seatbelt is
buckled and the passenger’s seatbelt is not and
the passenger airbag is enabled, with a passenger
detected by the passenger sensing system.

United States

Canada

If your vehicle has the traction control system and this
message is displayed when you’re driving, there may be
a problem with your traction control system. Your
vehicle may need service.
When this message is displayed, the traction control
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
If there’s an engine-related and brake system problem
that is specifically related to traction control, the
traction control system will turn off and the warning
message will come on.
If the traction control system warning message comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

3-51

Traction Active Message

United States

Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Message

Canada

If your vehicle has the traction control system, the
TRACTION ACTIVE message will appear when the
traction control system is limiting wheel spin. You may
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
appears, so adjust your driving accordingly. The
message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction
control system stops limiting wheel spin.

United States

Canada

This message will come on when your engine gets
too hot.
If this message comes on, it means that your engine
coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your
vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28.

3-52

Charging System Indicator Message

Reduced Engine Power Message

The charging system
battery symbol will come
on in the message
center when you turn on
the ignition as a check
to show you it is working.
United States
It will remain on as long as the engine is not running. It
should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this indicator appears in the
message center could drain your battery.

Canada

If your vehicle has this feature, this message will appear
in the message center when a noticeable reduction in
the vehicle’s engine performance is detected. This
message will also appear when your vehicle is in
overheated engine protection operating mode. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more information.
If this message comes on and stays on, see your dealer.

If you must drive a short distance with the message on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.

3-53

Low Oil Pressure Message

{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States

Canada

Your vehicle is equipped with a low oil pressure
warning message.
Your oil pressure message lets you know when you
may have a problem with your engine oil pressure.
When the engine is running and this message appears,
the engine oil level may be too low. There may also
be another problem causing low oil pressure.

3-54

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.

Low Engine Oil Level Message

United States

Canada

Your vehicle may have a low engine oil level message.
If this message comes on, it means your engine is
low on oil. You should check your oil level right away.
Have your vehicle serviced immediately.

Change Engine Oil Message

United States

Canada

When this message comes on and stays on after you
have started the engine, it means that service is required
for your vehicle. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more
information.

See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information.

3-55

Low Tire Message

United States

Door Ajar Warning Message

Canada

Your vehicle may have the check tire pressure system
which can alert you to a large change in the pressure
of one tire. After the system has been properly
calibrated, the low tire pressure message will come on
and a chime will sound if a pressure difference, or
low pressure, is detected in one tire.

United States

Canada

This message will come on when the ignition is turned
to ON or START and the driver’s or passenger’s
door is open.

Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message

The message will stay on until you turn off the ignition
or reset (calibrate) the system. See Check Tire Pressure
System on page 5-62.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on,
the check tire pressure system may not be working
properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45.

United States

Canada

This message will come on when the ignition is turned
to ON or START and the liftgate is open.
3-56

Check Gas Cap Message
If your vehicle is equipped,
this message will come on
when the ignition is
turned to on or start and
the gas cap is open.

PASS-Key® III Security Message

All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning
Message

United States

Canada

Your vehicle may have this message. If it does, it will
come on when there is a spare tire on the vehicle, or
when the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on,
or when the rear differential fluid is overheating. This
message will go out when the differential fluid cools.

United States

Canada

If you are ever driving and this message comes on and
stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off.
Your PASS-Key® III system, however, is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® III system at
this time. See PASS-Key® III on page 2-17 for more
information.

The all-wheel drive system will be disabled until the
compact spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the
warning message is still on after putting on the full-size
tire, you need to reset the warning message. To
reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and
then back on again. If the message stays on, see your
dealer right away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
System on page 4-11 for more information.

3-57

Low Washer Fluid Warning Message

United States

Canada

Your vehicle may have a low washer fluid warning
message. If your washer fluid is low, this warning
message will come on and stay on until you add washer
fluid. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-37 for
adding washer fluid instructions.
If the warning message is still on after adding fluid, you
need to reset the warning message. To reset the
warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on.
If the message stays on, see your dealer.

3-58

Low Fuel Warning Message

United States

Canada

If your fuel is low, the warning message will come on
and stay on until you add fuel.
If the warning message is still on after adding fuel, you
need to reset the warning message. To reset the
warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on.
If the message stays on, see your dealer.

Low Brake Fluid Warning Message

United States

Canada

If your brake fluid is low, the warning message will
come on and stay on until you add brake fluid.
The brake system warning light will also be illuminated.
If this message appears, the brakes need attention.
You should have your vehicle serviced immediately. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-44 and Brakes
on page 5-38.
If the warning message is still on after adding fluid, you
may need to reset the warning message. To reset the
warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on.
If the message stays on, see your dealer right away.

Service Vehicle Soon Message

United States

Canada

This light will come on if your vehicle has certain
non-emission related problems.
For example, if the entire electrical system fails to send
and receive messages from the vehicle’s components,
this message will come on.
These problems may not be obvious and may affect
vehicle performance or durability. Consult a qualified
dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle
performance.

3-59

Program Mode Message

United States

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Battery Low Warning Message

Canada

If you receive this message, your vehicle is in program
mode. If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you are ready to begin
programming your vehicle’s customization features. See
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-66 for more
information.

3-60

United States

Canada

If you receive this message, the battery in the remote
keyless entry needs to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-6 for instructions.

Parking Lamp Warning Message

United States

Canada

If you receive this message, one or both of the vehicle’s
parking lamp bulbs needs replacement. See Bulb
Replacement on page 5-49 for bulb replacement
instructions.

Highbeam Out Warning Message

United States

Canada

If you receive this message, one or both of the vehicle’s
high-beam headlamp bulbs needs replacement. See
Bulb Replacement on page 5-49 for more information.

3-61

Driver Information Center (DIC)

Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the
country, the difference is great enough to cause the
compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the
compass must be recalibrated.

Compass Calibration
United States shown, Canada similar
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the display is located on the instrument
panel cluster in the tachometer gage. The DIC will show
information about the vehicle and the surroundings.
The DIC is capable of displaying English or French. To
change the language, press and hold the MODE
button until the language you want is displayed. The
MODE button is located on the instrument panel, to the
left of the steering column. Release the button to set
your choice. See DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-64 to change the display from English to metric.
The DIC contains a compass display to show you
which direction the vehicle is driving.

3-62

If the calibration required symbol, or C, appears in the
compass, you must manually put the compass into the
calibration mode. To enter this mode, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on and press the MODE button
until CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
2. Press and hold the SET button for longer than
three seconds.

PRESS SET TO CALIBRATE COMPASS:
After selecting your zone, press the MODE button and
this will be displayed on the DIC. Press and hold
the SET button and complete three 360 degree turns in
an area free from large metal objects at a speed no
faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The following two messages will toggle in the display
until you calibrate the compass:

• DRIVE VEHICLE IN CIRCLE
• CALIBRATING COMPASS
When calibration is complete, the vehicle direction will
be displayed instead of the C symbol.

ZONE - - PRESS & HOLD SET TO CHANGE:
This display mode will appear when you are manually
calibrating the system. When the compass is being
recalibrated for the first time, the zone symbol will be
displayed. When the compass is being recalibrated any
time after that, the current zone number for compass
variance will be displayed in place of the zone symbol.
Use the SET button to select the zone number from
the graphic shown to select the current area of the
country that you are driving in.

3-63

DIC Controls and Displays
When the ignition is turned to ON or START, the DIC
will display the following:
BUICK: BUICK will be displayed for three seconds.
DRIVER #: This message will be displayed for another
three seconds after BUICK appears in the display.
This display lets the driver know which driver’s remote
keyless entry transmitter is being used and the
driver’s customization features.
The DIC controls are
located to the left of the
steering column on
the instrument panel.

MODE: This button lets you cycle through the options
on the display.
SET: This button is used to select and set the options
to your preference.
The DIC will always display the compass reading and
the outside temperature. If the temperature is below
38°F (3°C), the temperature reading will toggle between
displaying the temperature and the word ICE for
two minutes.
AVG ECONOMY (Average Economy): Average fuel
economy is viewed as a long term approximation of your
overall driving conditions. To learn the average fuel
economy from a new starting point, press and hold the
SET button while the average fuel economy is
displayed on the DIC. The average fuel economy will
set to zero.
INST ECONOMY (Instant Economy): Instant fuel
economy reflects the fuel economy that the vehicle has
right now. Instant fuel economy varies with your
driving conditions, such as acceleration, braking and the
grade of the road being traveled. Unlike average fuel
economy, instant fuel economy cannot be reset.

The DIC will be in the last mode displayed when the
engine was turned off. To select a different mode, press
MODE. The display will cycle through its options at
each press of MODE.

3-64

FUEL RANGE: The fuel range is an estimated distance
that your vehicle can travel on the remaining fuel.
The fuel economy used to calculate the range is based
on your driving history since the last reset of the
average speed.

FUEL USED: The fuel used display will show you how
much fuel has been used since the last time it was
reset. To reset the fuel used to zero, press and hold the
SET button while the fuel used is displayed on the
DIC and until the display goes to zero.
AVG SPEED (Average Speed): The average speed
display will show your average speed from when
you first started your vehicle. To reset the average
speed, press and hold the SET button while the average
speed is displayed on the DIC and until the speed
resets to your current speed.
OIL LIFE LEFT HOLD SET TO RESET: This message
displays the current percentage of the oil life by the
engine oil life system. Be careful not to reset this display
other than when the oil has been changed. See “How
to Reset the Engine Oil Life System” under Engine
Oil Life System on page 5-19 for more information.

TIRE PRESSURE: The check tire pressure system can
alert you to a large change in the pressure of one
tire. If the tire pressure is normal, TIRE PRESSURE
NORMAL will display. If the tire pressure is low,
LOW TIRE PRESSURE will display. You must begin
driving before the system will detect a low tire pressure.
See Check Tire Pressure System on page 5-62.
USE SET TO SELECT ENGLISH METRIC: You can
use this display to select English or metric. Press
the SET button to toggle between English or metric.
The DIC, the odometer, the trip odometer and head-up
display will change. A Canadian odometer and trip
odometer will remain in metric units only.
OFF: No driver information will be displayed in this
mode. If the DIC is left in this mode for more than three
seconds, the display will turn off. Press the MODE
button to start the DIC.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine Oil
on page 5-16.

3-65

DIC Vehicle Personalization

Entering Programming Mode

The DIC is used to program the choices of two drivers.
The drivers are recognized as DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 in
the DIC display. You will let the DIC know which driver
you are by using your remote keyless entry transmitter.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter was
pre-programmed to belong to DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.
Each transmitter may be programmed differently for each
driver’s preferences (lights, doors, horn or activate the
programmed radio stations for driver 1 or driver 2) using
your remote keyless entry transmitter.

To program features, your vehicle must be in the
programming mode. Do the following:

After you press the LOCK button on your transmitter
and the ignition key is in ON, the DIC will display
the identified driver number. The vehicle will also recall
the vehicle customization features that were last
programmed to correspond to your transmitter.
If you unlock your vehicle using your key instead of
your transmitter, the DIC will not change drivers
and your vehicle will recall the information from the last
transmitter used.
If your vehicle does not have a DIC, you do not have
available the vehicle customization features using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3-66

1. Turn the ignition key to ON with the vehicle in
PARK (P).
2. Press and release the MODE button, scrolling
through the DIC messages, until
PERSONALIZATION PRESS SET TO BEGIN is
displayed.
3. Press the SET button and TO SELECT DRIVER
PRESS REMOTE LOCK will appear. Press the
LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. This identifies which remote keyless
entry transmitter is being programmed by displaying
PERSONALIZATION FOR DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.

30: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for
30 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.
60: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for
60 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.

United States

Canada

4. The program mode message will appear in the
message center as an indication that your vehicle
is ready to begin programming.
5. Follow the instructions given by the DIC.

Headlamp Exit Delay
This feature allows you to customize the headlamps and
parking lamps. This feature can be programmed to
one of the following modes:
OFF: The headlamps and parking lamps will not turn
on at the same instant that the ignition is turned to OFF.

Your vehicle was originally programmed to 30 second
mode. The mode may have been changed since
then. To determine the current mode, or to change the
mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until HEADLMP EXIT
DELAY appears in the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before the
mode you prefer.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

15: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on
for 15 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.

3-67

Interior Lighting Delay
The interior lighting delay feature can be programmed to
one of the following modes:
OFF: This feature will not illuminate the interior of your
vehicle when all of the doors are closed.
ON: This feature will continue to illuminate the interior
lamps for 25 seconds after all doors have been
closed so that you can find your ignition and buckle
your safety belt at night.
Interior lighting delay will not occur while the ignition is
in ON. After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade
out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if one
of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned to ON
• All doors are locked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter

• There is no occupant activity detected for an
illumination period of 25 seconds

Your vehicle was originally programmed to ON. The
mode may have been changed since then. To determine
the current mode, or to change the mode, do the
following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until INTERIOR LIGHTING
DELAY appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before ON
or OFF.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

Interior Lighting On
The interior lighting on feature can be programmed to
one of the following modes:
KEY OUT: The interior lamps will come on for about
25 seconds whenever you remove the key from
the ignition.
DOOR: The interior lamps will come on for about
25 seconds when any door is opened.

3-68

Interior lighting on will not occur while the ignition is in
ON. After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade
out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if
one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned to ON
• LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry
transmitter

• There is no occupant activity detected for an
illumination period of 25 seconds
Your vehicle was originally programmed to DOOR. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.

Auto Door Lock/Unlock
The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK (P). For automatic unlocking, you can
program your vehicle to one of the following modes:
OFF: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), your
doors will not unlock automatically.
DRIVER: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), only
your driver’s door will unlock.
ALL: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), all doors
will unlock.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to ALL. The
mode may have been changed since then. To determine
the current mode, or to change the mode, do the
following:

2. Press the MODE button until INTERIOR LIGHTING
ON appears on the DIC.

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.

3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before KEY
OUT or DOOR.

2. Make sure that the AUTO DOOR LOCK feature is
programmed to ON.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

3. Press the MODE button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC.
4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before OFF,
DRIVER or ALL.

3-69

If the auto door unlock feature has been programmed to
DRIVER or ALL, the automatic door unlock feature
can also be programmed to one of the following modes:

Delayed Locking
The delayed locking feature can be programmed to one
of the following modes:

PARK: Unlock when the shift lever is put in PARK (P).
KEY OUT: Unlock when the ignition key is removed.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to PARK. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Follow the instructions for programming AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK to DRIVER or ALL listed
previously.
3. Press the MODE button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK/PARK KEYOUT appears on the DIC.
4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
PARK or KEY OUT.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

3-70

ON: Lock your vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter while any door
is opened, you will hear three chimes and the doors will
not lock. Five seconds after the last door is closed,
all doors will lock.
Once delayed locking is programmed to ON, you can do
the following:

• Cancel the delayed locking by pressing unlock
using the power door lock switch or by fully inserting
the key in the ignition

• Override the delayed locking feature by pressing
lock immediately using the power door lock
switch

• Let the delayed locking feature complete the locking
of the vehicle
OFF: The doors will always lock immediately when you
lock the doors using the power door lock switch or
press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Your vehicle was originally programmed to ON. The
mode may have been changed since then. To determine
the current mode, or to change the mode, do the
following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until DELAYED LOCKING
appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before ON
or OFF.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

Remote Door Unlock
The remote door unlock feature can be programmed to
one of the following modes:
DRIVER/ALL: With the first press of UNLOCK on the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the driver’s door
will unlock, and with the second press of UNLOCK,
within five seconds of the first press, all passenger’s
doors will unlock.
ALL: All doors will unlock with every press of UNLOCK
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to ALL. The
mode may have been changed since then. To determine
the current mode, or to change the mode, do the
following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
DRIVER/ALL or ALL.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

3-71

Unlock Feedback
The unlock feedback feature can be programmed to one
of the following modes:
LIGHTS: This mode does the following:

• During the day, when the ignition is in OFF and

Your vehicle was originally programmed to LIGHTS.
The mode may have been changed since then.
To determine the current mode, or to change the mode,
do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.

UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, the headlamps and parking lamps
will flash.

2. Follow the instructions for programming HEADLMP
EXIT DELAY earlier in this section, to make sure
which mode it is programmed to.

• During the night, when the ignition is in OFF, the

3. Press the MODE button until UNLOCK FEEDBACK
appears on the DIC.

headlamps and parking lamps will be activated
for 30 seconds when UNLOCK is pressed on the
remote keyless entry transmitter. If you would like to
change the amount of time the lamps stay on,
change the headlamp exit delay feature.
OFF: The headlamps and parking lamps will not flash
when UNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.

3-72

4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
LIGHTS or OFF.
5. Press the MODE button until you have determined
which mode you prefer, to follow with the
personalization.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

Lock Feedback
The lock feedback feature can be programmed to one
of the following modes:
OFF: When LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the headlamps and parking lamps will
not flash and the horn will not sound.
LIGHTS: When LOCK is pressed on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the headlamps and parking
lamps will flash briefly.
LIGHTS and HORN: When LOCK is pressed a second
time on the remote keyless entry transmitter within
five seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps
will flash briefly and the horn will sound.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to LIGHTS and
HORN. The mode may have been changed since
then. To determine the current mode, or to change the
mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until LOCK FEEDBACK
appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before OFF,
LIGHTS or LIGHTS and HORN.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

Seat Recall
The seat recall feature can be programmed to one of
the following modes:
ON: The previously programmed memory seat position
will be recalled when the UNLOCK button is pressed
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
OFF: No memory seat position will be recalled when
you press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is
programmed or to program your vehicle to a different
mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until SEAT RECALL
appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before ON
or OFF.

3-73

If the seat recall feature has been programmed to ON,
the seat recall feature can also be programmed to
one of the following modes:
MEMORY: The position recalled will be the memory
driving position.
EXIT: The position recalled will be the previously
programmed exit position.
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is
programmed or to program your vehicle to a different
mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Follow the instructions for programming SEAT
RECALL to ON listed previously.
3. Press the MODE button until RECALL POSITION
appears on the DIC.
4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
MEMORY or EXIT.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.

3-74

Tilt Mirror
The tilt mirror feature can be programmed to one of the
following modes:
ON: The passengers side outside rearview mirror will
tilt down towards the curb when the vehicle is shifted to
REVERSE (R) and returns to its previous position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R).
OFF: The mirror will not tilt.
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is
programmed or to program your vehicle to a different
mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until TILT MIRROR
appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before ON
or OFF.
The mode you selected is now set. You can exit
programming mode by following the instructions next in
this section.

Exiting Programming Mode

Audio System(s)

To exit programming mode, do one of the following:

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.

• Shift out of PARK (P).
• Turn the ignition key out of ON.
• Do not program any commands for one minute
while in the programming mode.
The programming mode message will turn off to let you
know that you are no longer in the programming mode.
Once you have reached the end of the personalization
features, PERSONALIZATION SELECTION DONE
will appear briefly. Then PRESS SET TO EXIT MODE
TO CONTINUE will appear. Pressing SET will exit
you out of the DIC. Pressing MODE will take you to the
beginning of personalization.

Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-21 for more
information.

3-75

Setting the Time

Radio with CD

Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on the
display. AM will appear for morning hours. Press
and hold M until the correct minute appears on the
display. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold H and M at the same time until TIME UPDATED
appears on the display. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDATE will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.

Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

3-76

This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
To get to SCV, push the TUNE/AUDIO knob repeatedly
until SPEED VOL appears on the display. Turn the
TUNE/AUDIO knob to select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each
higher setting allows for more volume compensation
at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV
automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to
overcome noise at any speed. The volume level should
always sound the same to you as you drive. To turn
SCV off, press SCV until OFF appears on the display.

3-77

DISP (Display): Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Press this button to display the time when the ignition is
turned off.
For RDS, press the DISP button to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The display
options are station, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until you see the display you want, then hold the
button until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again
to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the
preset number appear on the display. You will hear
a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.

3-78

Setting Preset Stations

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:

AUDIO: Push and release this knob until BASS, MID,
or TREBLE appears on the display. Then turn the
AUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is
weak or noisy, decrease the treble.

1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then push and
hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero, or TREBLE
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by waiting five seconds without making any changes.
Then push and hold the AUDIO knob for more than two
seconds until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country/western,
jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

3-79

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the
AUDIO knob to move the sound toward the right or
the left speakers. A bar graph with indicators will show
how the sound is balanced.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A
bar graph with indicators will show how the sound is
balanced.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FADE. Then push and hold the AUDIO knob
for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. The
indicator will be centered on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by waiting five seconds without making any changes.
Then push and hold the AUDIO knob for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display.

3-80

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the PTY
is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once. If the
PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice
to display the PTY and then to go to another station.
5. Press P-TYP to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.
The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SEEK arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SEEK arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
each press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.

3-81

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
Press this button to receive the traffic announcement
from the station and brackets will be displayed around
TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

3-82

The radio will play the traffic announcements if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

Radio Messages
CAL (CALIBRATE): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.

XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

XL (Explicit Language
Channels)

XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating

Updating encryption
code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.

No Signal

Loss of signal

The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.

CH Off Air

Channel not in service

This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.

CH Unavail

Channel no longer
available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info

Artist Name/Feature not
available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.

3-83

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

No Info

Song/Program Title not
available

No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

Category Name not
available

No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

No Text/Informational
message available

No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found

No channel available for
the chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.

XM Locked

Theft lock active

The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.

Radio ID

Radio ID label
(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.

Unknown

Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr

Hardware failure

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

3-84

Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the
radio is off, first press the eject or DISP button.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.

1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
2 \(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select an equalization
setting while playing a CD. The equalization will be set
whenever a CD is played. See “EQ” listed previously
for more information.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If
either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the
player will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-85

To scan tracks, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you
will hear a beep. The CD will go to the next track,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next track.
The sound will mute and SCAN and the track number
will appear on the display while scanning. The CD
will only scan forward. Press either SEEK arrow again
to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see
how long it has been playing. To change the default on
the display, track or elapsed time, press this button
until you see the display you want, then hold the button
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio.

Z (Eject):

Press this button to eject the CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition or radio off, if this
button is pressed first.

3-86

CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could for one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

Listening to a DVD

Radio with Cassette and CD

Your vehicle may have a Rear Seat Entertainment
System, see Rear Seat Entertainment System on
page 3-115 for more information. If your vehicle has this
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicles
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the CD button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current source
will stop and the DVD sound will come through the
speakers. To stop listening to the DVD, press the CD
button to play a CD, or press the BAND button to select
a different source.
When the RSE system is turned off, the radio will
display RSE OFF and the radio will return to the last
selected audio source that you were listening to.

Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.

3-87

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers 100 coast to coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

3-88

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): Press this button to display the time
when the ignition is turned off.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until you see the display you want, then hold the
button until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, the
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
To use SCV, press the TUNE/AUDIO knob repeatedly
until SPEED VOL appears on the display. Turn the
TUNE/AUDIO knob to select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each
higher setting will provide more volume compensation
at faster vehicle speeds.
To turn SCV off, press the TUNE/AUDIO knob repeatedly
until SPEED VOL appears on the display. Turn the TUNE
AUDIO knob until OFF appears on the display.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again
to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until SCAN and
the preset number appear on the display and you hear
a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
preset station. Press either SEEK arrow again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

3-89

Setting Preset Stations

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:

AUDIO: Push and release AUDIO until BASS, MID, or
TREBLE appears on the display. Then turn the
AUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is
weak or noisy, decrease the treble.

1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1,
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-90

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then push and
hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero, or TREBLE
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to
the middle position, end out of audio mode by waiting
five seconds without making any changes. Then push
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country/western,
jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob
to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
A bar graph with indicators will appear on the display.

To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:

To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release AUDIO until FADE appears
on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A bar
graph with indicators will appear on the display.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FADE. Then push and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. The indicator
will be centered on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio mode by
waiting five seconds without making any changes. Then
push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display.

1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.
P-TYPE will appear on the display.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and to take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the PTY
is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once. If the
PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice
to display the PTY and then to go to another station.
5. Press P-TYP to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
the selected PTY and traffic announcements.

3-91

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.
P-TYPE will appear on the display.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SEEK arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow to stop at
a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for the
selected PTY and traffic announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

3-92

RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current radio
station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will hear
the announcement, even if the volume is low or a
cassette tape or CD is playing. If a cassette tape or CD is
playing, play will stop during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all
RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press the INFO button. A
new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of this button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the
display until another new message is received. The last
message can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button. You can view the last message until a new
message is received or a different station is tuned to.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press this button and the radio will seek to a station
that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and
brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

The radio will play the traffic announcements even if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a
cassette tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcasts
traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

Radio Messages
CAL (Calibrate): The audio system has been calibrated
for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL appears on
the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and must be returned
to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Return your
vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-93

XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

XL (Explicit Language
Channels)

XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating

Updating encryption
code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.

No Signal

Loss of signal

The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.

CH Off Air

Channel not in service

This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.

CH Unavail

Channel no longer
available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info

Artist Name/Feature not
available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.

No Info

Song/Program Title not
available

No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

3-94

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

No Info

Category Name not
available

No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

No Text/Informational
message available

No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found

No channel available for
the chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.

XM Locked

Theft lock active

The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in
another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot
be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your GM
dealer.

Radio ID

Radio ID label
(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.

Unknown

Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr

Hardware failure

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

3-95

Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject or the
DISP button to insert and to begin play of a tape. If the
ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME and AUDIO
controls just as you do for the radio. The display will
show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.

3-96

1s(Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed.
2 \(Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the tape
advances. Press this pushbutton again to return
to playing speed.
6 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.

© SEEK ¨: The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for seek
to work. Press the left or the right arrow to go to the
previous or to the next selection on the tape. SEEK and a
negative or positive number will appear on the display.
Pressing the left or right arrow multiple times will increase
the number of selections to be searched up to -5 or +5. If
-5 or +5 is shown on the display, the cassette tape player
will fast forward or rewind through the four selections and
stop at the fifth selection.
To scan cassette tape selections, press and hold either
SEEK arrow for two seconds until SCN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. The tape will go to the next
selection, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
selection. The cassette tape will only scan forward. Press
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or a
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

Z (Eject):

Press this button, located next to the
cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassette
tapes may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.

Cassette Tape Messages
If an error message appears on the display, it could be
for one of the following reasons:

CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on the
display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon
as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player.
See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-134.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good cassette.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.

CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on the tape player.

TIGHT TAPE: This message is displayed when the
tape is tight and the player cannot turn the tape hubs.
Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down
and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a
pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not
turn easily, the tape may be damaged and should not
be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure the
player is working properly.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

BROKEN TAPE: This message is displayed when the
tape is broken. Try a new tape.

The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.

1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.
4. Press and hold the CD TAPE button until READY
appears on the display.

3-97

Playing a CD

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD when the ignition or the
radio is off, first press the eject or the DISP button.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.

3-98

1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage.
2 \(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see
how long it has been playing. To change the default on
the display, track or elapsed time, press this button
until you see the display you want, then hold the button
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.

Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the
player will continue moving backward through the CD.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the CD.
To scan tracks, press and hold either SEEK arrow for two
seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear
a beep. The CD will go to the next track, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next track. The sound will
mute and SCAN and the track number will appear on the
display. The CD will only scan forward. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.

Z (Eject):

Press this button, located next to the
CD slot, to eject a tape. Eject may be activated with
either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with
the ignition and radio off if you press this button first.

3-99

Listening to a DVD

Radio with Six-Disc CD

Your vehicle may have a Rear Seat Entertainment
System, see Rear Seat Entertainment System on
page 3-115 for more information. If your vehicle has this
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will appear
on the radio display indicating that the DVD is available
and can be listened to through your vehicles speakers.
To listen to the DVD, press the CD TAPE button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current source
will stop playing and the DVD sound will come
through the speakers.
To stop listening to the DVD, press the CD TAPE button
to listen to a CD or a tape, or press the BAND button
to listen to the radio.

Radio Data System (RDS)

When the RSE system is turned off, the radio will
display RSE OFF and the radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.

The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

3-100

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100
coast-to-coast channels including music, news, sports,
talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. To turn automatic volume off,
press this button until OFF appears on the display.

3-101

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the RCL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the RCL knob while in
XM mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

3-102

sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display and you will hear a double
beep. The radio will go to the first preset station stored
on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset Stations

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:

AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID, or
TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.

1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The display level will be adjusted to
the middle position and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear one beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ
button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then
manually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the
AUDIO knob.

3-103

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The display level will be adjusted to
the middle position and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear one beep.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected
PTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select and to take you to the
PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the PTY
is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once. If the
PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice
to display the PTY and then to go to another station.
5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

3-104

To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a CD, the last selected RDS station will
interrupt play if that selected program type format
is broadcast.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.

3-105

3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-106

INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of this button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio will seek to a station that does. When a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements is found, the radio
will stop seeking and brackets will be displayed
around TRAF. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will
appear on the display.

Radio Messages

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to the dealer for service.

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it
must be returned to the dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.

The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

3-107

XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

XL (Explicit Language
Channels)

XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating

Updating encryption
code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.

No Signal

Loss of signal

The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.

CH Off Air

Channel not in service

This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.

CH Unavail

Channel no longer
available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info

Artist Name/Feature not
available

No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

3-108

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

No Info

Song/Program Title not
available

No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

Category Name not
available

No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.

No Info

No Text/Informational
message available

No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found

No channel available for
the chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.

XM Locked

Theft lock active

The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.

Radio ID

Radio ID label
(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.

Unknown

Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr

Hardware failure

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-109

Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.

3-110

LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will
hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
4. Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Press the LOAD button again. Once the light
turns green, load the next disc. Repeat this
procedure for each CD. The CD player takes up to
six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, the
radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will be displayed.

Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under
the CD number that is playing and the track number
will appear.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of this
button to eject a CD(s). You will hear a beep and the
indicator light will flash to let you know when a CD
is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will appear on the display. The CD can
be remove. If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,
the CD will be automatically pulled back into the
player. If the CD is pushed back into the player, before
the 25 second time period is complete, the player
will sense an error and will try to eject the CD several
times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after trying to push it in manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,
causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove
the CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off
and then on again, or wait for the system to reset.
This will clear the CD-sensing feature and enable CDs
to be loaded into the player again.

{ REV (Reverse):

Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.

3-111

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.

3-112

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be set whenever a CD
is played. For more information on AUTO EQ,
see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section.

sSEEK t:

Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.

sSCAN t:

To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display, track and elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a CD
is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.

Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After two
seconds of continuously pressing the SONG LIST
button, two beeps will be heard to confirm that
the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. One
beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the
order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return to
the first saved track.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.

3-113

To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, one
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
3-114

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.

CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.

Rear Seat Entertainment System

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system includes
a DVD player, a video display screen, two sets of
wireless headphones, and a remote control.

Listening to a DVD

Parental Control

This button is located behind the video screen, next to the
auxiliary jacks, near the driver of the vehicle. Press this
button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video
and mute the audio. The video screen will display
Parental Control On and the power indicator light on the
DVD player will flash. It will also disable all other button
operations from the remote control and the DVD player,
with the exception of the eject button. The driver will then
be able to gain the attention of the rear seat passengers.
Press this button again to restore normal operation of the
DVD player and remote control.

To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current source
will stop and the DVD sound will come through the
speakers. To stop listening to the DVD press the CD
AUX button, if a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button
to select a different source.
When the RSE system is turned off, the radio will
display RSE OFF and the radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.

This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is
in an enabled power mode.

3-115

Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
The DVD system is designed to be inoperable when the
vehicle is exposed to extremely low or high
temperatures, in order to protect the system from
damage. Operate the DVD system under normal or
comfortable cabin temperature ranges.

Headphones
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF switch and
a volume control. To use the headphones, turn the
switch to ON. An indicator light on the headphones will
illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section for more information. Switch the
headphones to OFF when not in use.

3-116

The transmitters are located below the overhead RSE
control panel. The headphones will shut off automatically
to save the battery power if the DVD system is shut
off, or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. If you move
too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
headphones will lose the audio signal.
To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones, use
the volume control.
You can listen to the RSE system through the wired
headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system
(if equipped) when the following occurs:

• The RSA system is on
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing
• RSE is displayed on the front audio system by
pressing the TAPE/CD button on the RSA system
See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-130 for more
information.
If the front seat passengers are listening to the RSE
system through the vehicle’s speakers and the rear seat
passengers are using the wired headphones to listen
to the RSA system, the BAND button will not access
XM™ Satellite Radio Service.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or DVD
play, there may be a low hissing noise through the
speakers and/or headphones. If the hissing sound in the
wireless headphones seems excessive, make sure
that the headphone batteries are fully charged. Some
amount of hissing is normal.

Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
3. Tighten the screw on the battery compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries, and keep them in a cool,
dry place.

Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on
the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow audio and
video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the
RSE. The yellow RCA jack is used for video inputs, the
red RCA jack for right audio inputs, and the white
RCA jack for left audio inputs. The system requires
standard RCA cables, not included, to connect the
auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs, connect an
external auxiliary device such as a camcorder to the
RCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary device power
and the power on the front of the RSE player.
If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned on,
the player will automatically begin playing the disc
and the user will need to press the SRCE button on the
remote control or on the DVD player faceplate to
switch the system between the DVD player and the
auxiliary device. See “DVD Player” and “Remote
Control” later in this section for more information.

3-117

Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices can be
heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle’s Speakers
• Rear Seat Audio (RSA) RCA Jacks (if equipped).
Plug the wired headphones (not included) into
the jacks on the RSA system.
Only one audio source can be heard through the
vehicle’s speakers at a time.
The RSE system or an auxiliary device can be heard
through all of the vehicles speakers when the following
occurs:

• The RSA system (if equipped) is off
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing
• The front audio system is on and either the CD, the
CD TAPE, or the CD AUX button is pressed to
enable the RSE system
RSE will appear on the radio display when the RSE
system is on and RSE OFF, when it is off.

3-118

To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press either
the CD, the CD TAPE, or the CD AUX button on
the radio. The audio from the RSE system can be heard
through the wireless headphones and the vehicles
speakers at the same time.
The volume on the radio may vary when switching
between a radio station, CD, DVD, cassette, or auxiliary
device.
If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or DVD
play, there may be a low hissing noise through the
speakers and/or headphones. If the hissing sound in the
wireless headphones seems excessive, make sure
that the headphone batteries are fully charged. Some
amount of hissing is normal.

Video Screen

DVD Player

The video screen is located in the overhead console.

The DVD player is located in the overhead console.

To use the video screen, do the following:

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player, and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section for
more information.

1. Push forward on the release button and the screen
will fold down.
2. Push the screen away from you and adjust its
position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
stowed and latched position.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the video screen is in either the up or down
positions.
The video screen contains the transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the receiver for the remote
control. If the screen is in the closed position, the signals
will not be available for the operation of the headphones
or the remote control.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.

The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.

3-119

DVD Player Buttons

s (Play/Pause):

Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue play of a
DVD or CD.

y (Main Menu):

Press this button to view the media
menu. The media menu is different on every DVD.
Use the up, down, right, and left arrow buttons to move
the cursor around the media menu. After making a
selection press enter. This button only operates when
using a DVD.

z (Display Control Button):
Y (Eject):

Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on and off.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

o (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding. Press this button twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.

3-120

Press this button to
adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode,
and dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud
audio and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
To change a feature back to the factory default
setting, press this button to display the feature, then
press and hold this button. The default setting will
appear on the display.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.

n u, q t, p r, o [ (Directional Control
Circle): Press these buttons to move through menu
choices, or to move forward or back in a movie. These
controls can be used to move forward or backward
through a CD.

Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.

Playing a Disc

To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote
control or the DVD player faceplate.

To play a disc, gently insert the disc, label side up, into
the loading slot. The DVD player will continue loading
the disc and the player will automatically start if the
vehicle is in ACCESSORY, ON, START, or RAP.

If the disc has been ejected or if the stop button has
been pressed twice on the remote control or the
DVD player faceplate, the disc will resume play at the
beginning of the disc.

If a disc is already in the player, make sure that the
DVD player is on, then press the play/pause button on
the player faceplate or on the remote control.

Ejecting a Disc

r (Enter): Press this button to select choices
highlighted in any menu.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin playing at the main title,
refer to the on-screen instructions.

Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote
control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed, the
DVD player will reload the disc after a short period of
time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player. The DVD
player will not resume play of the disc automatically.

3-121

Remote Control

Remote Control Buttons

To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the transmitter to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects
blocking the line of sight will affect the function of the
remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.

O(Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
v (Title):

Press this button to go back to the title
screen, if there is one.

3-122

n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press these
buttons to move through DVD menus. The up arrow will
skip to the next chapter or track, the down arrow will
take you to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
Press the down arrow twice to take you to the previous
chapter or track. The right arrow will fast forward
and the left arrow will reverse through a chapter or track.
z (Display Control Button):

e (Sound):

Press this button to move to the next
language or commentary. Press this button to call up a
menu that will operate only when a DVD is playing. The
format and content of this function will vary for each disc.

r (Rewind):

Press this button to reverse the DVD.
To stop reversing, press this button again. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the current chapter or track. Press this
button again to return to the previous chapter or track.
This button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter, title, and
track number selection.

}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear):

Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs.

P (Backlight):

Press this button to turn the remote
control backlighting on.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

3-123

y (Main Menu):

Press this button to view the media
menu. The media menu is different on every disc.
Use the up, down, right, and left arrow buttons to move
the cursor around the media menu. After making a
selection, press the enter button.

r (Enter):

Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.

q (Return):

Press this button to go back one step in
any menu. Press this button to exit the current menu and
to move to the previous menu. This button will operate
only when a DVD is playing and/or a menu is active.

| (Camera):

This button changes camera angles on
DVDs that have this feature. Press this button to
display a menu that will operate only when a DVD is
being played. The format and content of this function will
vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles):

This button turns on subtitles and
moves through subtitle options (English, Spanish,
French, etc., if available). Press this button to call up a
menu that will operate only when a DVD is being
played. The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.

3-124

[ (Fast Forward):

Press this button to fast forward
the DVD. To stop fast forwarding, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.

s (Play/Pause):

Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD is playing
to pause it. Press it again to continue playing the
DVD or CD.

u (Next Chapter/Track):

Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.

Setup Menu
To access the setup menu, ensure that a DVD is in the
player and the video is stopped. Press the main menu
button. Once the menu is activated, use the directional
arrows and the enter button to navigate the screen.
The setup menu allows the user to select default
preferences for Menu Language, Subtitle Language,
Audio Language, TV Aspect, TV Mode, and Dynamic
Range Compression.

Not all DVDs support all the feature defaults in the setup
menus. In the event a particular feature is not supported,
defaults will be provided by the DVD media.
Exit the setup menu by pressing the return button on
the remote control or the DVD player. If changes
are made to the system setup defaults, the disc will
resume play from the beginning and not where it
previously left off.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
No power.

The ignition may not be in
ACCESSORY, ON,
START, or RAP. The
parental control button
might have been pressed.
The power indicator light
will flash.

Disc will not play.

The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the SRCE button to
switch between the DVD
player and the auxiliary
source. The disc is upside
down or is not compatible.

Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Unclip the battery door located on the back of the
remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.

Recommended Action

3-125

Problem
No sound.

Recommended Action

Problem

The volume on the
headphones could be too
low. Adjust the volume on
the right earpiece on the
wireless headphones. If
the DVD system is being
heard through the vehicle
speakers, adjust the
volume from the radio.
The radio must have the
RSE enabled by using the
CD, CD TAPE, or CD
AUX button.

I ejected the disc and tried
to take it out, but it was
pulled back into the slot.

Eject the disc again.

The language in the audio
or on the screen is wrong.

Press the main menu
button on the DVD player
or the remote control and
change the audio or
language selection on the
DVD menu.

The remote control does
not work.

Point the remote control
directly at the transmitter
window. The batteries
could be weak or put in
wrong. The parental
control button might have
been pressed. The power
indicator light will flash.

How do I get subtitles on
or off?

Press the subtitle button
on the remote control to go
to the DVDs main menu.
Then follow the screen
prompts.

The picture is distorted
during fast forward or
reverse.

This is normal for this
operation.

The picture does not fill the
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
bottom or on both sides or
it looks stretched out.

Quickly press and release
the display control button
on the remote control or
the DVD player and
choose Display Mode.
Then select Full. This will
fill the screen. If there are
borders on the top and
bottom, the movie may
have been made that way
for a standard screen.

3-126

Recommended Action

Problem

Recommended Action

After stopping the player, I
push the play button but
sometimes the DVD starts
where I left off, and
sometimes at the
beginning.

Press the stop button on
the remote control to
resume where the DVD
left off. Press the stop
button twice to start the
DVD at the beginning. If
the power is off and the
DVD is still in the player,
press the play button.

The DVD is playing but
there is no picture or
sound. The auxiliary
source is running but there
is no picture or sound.

Press and release the
SRCE button on the
remote control or the DVD
player to get to auxiliary
input. Check to make sure
that the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.

The audio or video skips or The DVD could be dirty or
jumps.
scratched. Try cleaning
the DVD.

Problem

Recommended Action

When I return to the DVD
from the system menu,
sometimes it plays from
the beginning and
sometimes from where it
left off.

If the stop button was
pressed once, it resumes
play from where it left off.
If the stop button was
pressed twice, it will start
at the beginning of the
DVD. However, if a
change was made to the
menu, the DVD will start
from where it left off, even
if the stop button was only
pressed once.

The fast forward, reverse,
previous, and next
functions do not work.

Some commands that do
one thing for DVDs will
not always work or
perform the same function
for audio, CDs or games.
These functions may also
be disabled when the
DVD is playing the
copyright information or
the previews.

3-127

Problem

Recommended Action

Problem

Recommended Action

My disc is stuck in the
player. The eject button
does not work.

Press the eject button on
the DVD player. Turn the
power off, then on again,
then press the eject
button on the DVD player.
Do not attempt to force or
remove the disc from the
player. If the problem
persists, return to your
GM dealer for further
assistance.

DVD System inoperable.

In severe or extreme
temperatures the DVD
system might not be
operable. Temperatures
below −4°F (−20°C) or
above 140°F (60°C) could
damage the DVD system.
Operate the DVD system
under normal or
comfortable cabin
temperature ranges.

I lost the remote control
and/or the headphones.

Contact your GM dealer
for assistance.

The wireless headphones
have audio distortion.

Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes for a moment,
then it comes back.

This could be caused by
interference from cell
towers or by using the
cellular telephone or other
radio transmitter device in
the vehicle.

Verify that the
headphones are facing to
the front of the vehicle,
left and right sides are
indicated on the
headphones to ensure
that the signal is received
properly.

In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.

Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
are good.

3-128

DVD Messages

DVD Distortion

The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen.

There may be an experience with video distortion when
operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios,
Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile
fax, or walkie talkies.

Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the disc format is not compatible.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
mechanism can not play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.

When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.

Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
No Disc: This message will be displayed when the play
button is pressed without a disc in the player.

Cleaning the DVD Player

Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.

3-129

Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that
includes Radio Data System (RDS) with Program
Type (PTY) selections that will seek out the kind of music
you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite Radio Service
capabilities (if equipped). The radio can also
communicate with the navigation system to broadcast
announcements on traffic, weather, and emergency alert
communications. For information on how to use this
system, see the “Navigation System” manual.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, or CDs. However,
the rear seat passengers can only control the sources
that the front seat passengers are not listening to.
For example, rear seat passengers may listen to and
control cassette tapes or CDs through the headphones
while the driver listens to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the
volume for each set of headphones.

3-130

The front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch the
source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will
not be able to control the source. You can operate the
rear seat audio when the main radio is off.
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and the system is on, the rear seat passengers
can listen to the DVDs through the wired headphone
jacks on the RSA system. The RSE system cannot be
controlled with the RSA system.
If the front seat passengers are listening to the RSE
system through the vehicle’s speakers and the rear seat
passengers are using the wired headphones to listen
to the RSA system, the BAND button will not access
XM™ Satellite Radio Service.

Primary Radio Controls
The following function is controlled by the main radio:
PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Controls

When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or the
down arrow to go to the next or the previous selection.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to a cassette tape.
When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the system on
or off.

The following functions are controlled by the RSA system:

w SEEK x: When listening to the radio, press the up
or the down arrow to go to the next or the previous
station and stay there. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow until
the radio goes into scan mode. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.

TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing
a cassette tape, a CD, or a DVD when listening to
the radio. The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). If the front
passengers are listening to the radio, the RSA will not
switch between the bands or change the frequency.
Press BAND to listen to the radio when a cassette tape
or a CD is playing. The inactive cassette or CD will
remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

3-131

The BAND button will not access XM™ Satellite Radio
service when the front seat passengers are listening
to the RSE system through the vehicle’s speakers and
the rear seat passengers are using the wired
headphones to listen to the RSA system.
P.SET PROG (Preset Program): Press this button to
scan through the preset radio stations set on the
pushbuttons on the main radio. The radio will go to a
preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press this button again to stop scanning presets. This
function is inactive if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to go to
the other side of the tape. This function is inactive if the
front seat passengers are listening to a cassette tape.
When a CD is playing, press this button to select the next
CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

VOL # (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
Push the knob back into its stored position when you are
not using it. The upper knob controls the upper
headphones and the lower knob controls the lower
headphones.
PHONES: To listen to the RSA sound, plug the wired
headphones, into these RCA jacks.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secret code to
disable all radio functions whenever battery power is
removed and the radio is placed in a different vehicle.
This feature requires no user input to be activated.
The radio is automatically armed when it is put into the
vehicle for the first time.
When the ignition is turned off, the blinking red light
indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
If THEFTLOCK® is activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED and a red
LED indicator light will come on above the key symbol
to indicate a locked condition. If this occurs, the radio will
need to be returned to your GM dealer.

3-132

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again, or any other radio button, to turn the sound on.

Q VOL R (Volume): Press the up or down arrow to
increase or decrease the volume.
Q SEEK R:

Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there. The
sound will mute while seeking. The radio will only seek
stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
When playing a cassette tape or a CD, press the up
arrow to go to the next selection.

If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
SOURCE: When listening to the radio, press this button
to play a cassette tape, CD, or a DVD (if equipped). If
a cassette tape, and CD, and/or DVD are loaded,
the system will go to the tape play first. The inactive
tape, CD, or DVD will remain safely inside the player for
future listening.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
SCAN: Press this button to scan the stations that are
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio
will go to the first preset station stored, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press this button again to stop scanning. The radio will
only scan preset stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.

3-133

Radio Reception

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or they may cause failure of the tape player.

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.

FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.

The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN PLAYER
to indicate that the tape player has been used for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, the cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it
should be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent
damage to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in
sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if the
tape or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has
no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
The cut tape detection feature of the cassette tape player
may identify the cleaning cassette tape as a damaged
tape, in error. If the cleaning cassette ejects, insert the
cassette at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning.

3-134

A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER
indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator
was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may
degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape
is in good condition before the tape player is serviced.

Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Integrated Windshield Antenna
The antenna in your vehicle is a very thin, metal layer in
the windshield. The outline of the antenna can be seen
near the edges of the windshield. The connector is at the
top of the windshield, where the headliner ends.
If difficulty with remote transmitters is experienced, such
as a garage door opener, try pointing the device
through the very top of the windshield.

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.

3-135

✍ NOTES

3-136

Section 4

Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Driver Behavior ..............................................4-2
Driving Environment ........................................4-2
Vehicle Design ...............................................4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-3
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-9
Traction Control System (TCS) .......................4-10
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-11
Steering ......................................................4-12
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-15

Driving at Night ............................................4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-18
City Driving ..................................................4-21
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-22
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-23
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24
Winter Driving ..............................................4-26
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-30
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-31
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-31
Towing ..........................................................4-36
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-36
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-36
Level Control ...............................................4-38
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-38

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Whenever we drive, we are taking on an important
responsibility. This is true for any motor
vehicle — passenger car, van, truck, sport utility. Driver
behavior, the driving environment, and the vehicle’s
design all affect how well a vehicle performs. But
statistics show that the most important factor, by far, is
how we drive.
Knowing how these three factors work together can help
you understand how your vehicle handles and what
you can do to avoid many types of crashes, including a
rollover crash.

Driver Behavior
The single most important thing is this: everyone in the
vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up. See Safety
Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-20. In fact, most
serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants can
be reduced or prevented by the use of safety belts. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. In addition,
avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt turns, and
drunken or aggressive driving can help make trips safer
and avoid the possibility of a crash, especially a rollover
crash. This section provides many useful tips to help you
drive more safely.
4-2

Driving Environment
You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of crash
by being prepared for driving in inclement weather, at
night, or during other times where visibility or traction
may be limited, such as on curves, slippery roads,
or hilly terrain. Unfamiliar surroundings can also have
hidden hazards.
To help you learn more about driving in different
conditions, this section contains information about city,
freeway, and off-road driving, as well as other hints
for driving in various weather conditions.

Vehicle Design
According to the U.S. Department of Transportation,
utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. Utility vehicles do
have higher ground clearance and a narrower track or
shorter wheelbase than passenger cars, to make
them more capable for off-road driving. Specific design
characteristics like these give the driver a better
view of the road, but also give utility vehicles a higher
center of gravity than other types of vehicles. This
means that you should not expect a utility vehicle to
handle the same way a vehicle with a lower center
of gravity, like a car, would in similar situations.

Defensive Driving

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.

The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.

Drunken Driving

But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause
of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or
vehicle factors. Safe driver behavior and understanding
the environment in which you will be driving can help
avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including
utility vehicles.

Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-20.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:

•
•
•
•

Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving.
4-3

In recent years, more than 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the
use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink alcohol, so
they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it
is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol

4-4

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about
0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by
drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three
mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors
like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.

4-5

There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.

4-6

Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10.

Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration.

But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a
lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough
space between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.

United States

Canada

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light on
the instrument panel will come on briefly when you
start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-8

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very
thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or feel
the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This will help
you retain steering control. If you do have anti-lock, it is
different. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-7.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.

4-9

Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on when
the traction control system is limiting wheel spin.
See Traction Active Message on page 3-52. You may
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.

4-10

United States

Canada

If this message comes on and stays on or comes on
while you are driving, there’s a problem with your
traction control system.
See Service Traction System Warning Message on
page 3-51. When this warning message is on, the TRAC
OFF light will come on to remind you that the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow on page 4-30.

To turn the system off,
press the TRAC OFF
button located on
the instrument panel
switchbank.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the
button, the message will go off, but the system will not
turn off until there is no longer a current need to limit
wheel spin. The TRAC OFF light will come on to remind
you the system is off. You can turn the system back on at
any time by pressing the button again. The traction
control system warning message should go off.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque may
be reduced to protect AWD system components. If
the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage,
the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the
system from overheating. When the system cools down,
the AWD system will activate itself again automatically;
this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending
on outside temperature and vehicle use. See All-Wheel
Drive Disable Warning Message on page 3-57.

4-11

Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

4-12

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-10.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-13

Off-Road Recovery

Passing

You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.

4-14

to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror,

activate your right lane change signal and move back
into the right lane. Remember that your right outside
mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may
seem to be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.

4-15

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Control System, remember: It
helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not have
this system, or if the system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.

4-16

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid, where the wheels are
no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakes
to get the wheels rolling again. This restores steering
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when
you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are
rolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at Night

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving,
do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things
invisible.

4-17

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.

4-18

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.

{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.

4-19

Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.

4-20

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-55.

City Driving

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-22.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.

4-21

Freeway Driving

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.

4-22

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.

4-23

Highway Hypnosis

Hill and Mountain Roads

Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.

4-24

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.

{CAUTION:

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.

levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
•

•
•

a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-25

Winter Driving

Also see Tires on page 5-55.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.

4-26

If you have traction control, it will improve your ability to
accelerate when driving on a slippery road. But you
can turn the traction system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See If You Are Stuck:
In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-30. Even
though your vehicle has a traction system, you will want
to slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to
turn the traction control system off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-10.
If you do not have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.

Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you will
want to brake very gently, too. If you do have anti-lock,
see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-7. This
system improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a
hard stop on a slippery road. Whether you have the
anti-lock braking system or not, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
Without anti-lock brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to
slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal
down steadily to get the most traction you can.

4-27

Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-28

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.

4-29

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.

{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-31.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-70.

4-30

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out

Loading Your Vehicle

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear
the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has
traction control, you should turn your traction control
system off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-10. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not
get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed
out. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-36.

It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-31

Tire and Loading Information Label

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-55
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your vehicle.
With the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label shows the number of
occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

4-32

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity
for your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-38 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.

Example 1
Item
A
B
C

Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
300 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and 700 lbs (317 kg)
Cargo Weight =

4-33

Example 2
Item
A
B
C

Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =

Example 3
Total

Item

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

750 lbs (340 kg)

250 lbs (113 kg)

Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

4-34

Certification/Tire Label

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:
United States version shown, Canada similar
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

4-35

If you put things inside your vehicle—like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.

4-36

Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device know as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would
prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll want to
make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed. See
Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-23.

Dolly Towing (Two-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles)
If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed
with two of its wheels on the ground. To dolly tow
your vehicle, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.

Dinghy Towing

If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be
towed with car carrier equipment.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its
wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on the
ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an
all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of its
wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car carrier
equipment.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.

Level Control
On vehicles equipped with automatic level control, the
rear of the vehicle is automatically kept level as you load
or unload your vehicle. However, you should still not
exceed the GVWR or the GAWR. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system
self-adjusts. This is normal. The compressor should
operate for brief periods of time. If the sound continues
for an extended period of time, your vehicle needs
service.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.

4-38

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability,
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That is the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. The
trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in
this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a
trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can use THIRD (3) or, as you need to, a lower
gear when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle
in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
buildup and extend the life of your transaxle.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• Weight of the trailer

• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
4-39

Weight of the Trailer

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers, or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your
vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-31 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.

It should never weigh more than 1,400 lbs (630 kg) with
up to five occupants in the vehicle or more than
2,000 lbs (900 kg) with up to two occupants. If you have
the optional trailer towing package, your vehicle can
tow up to 2,900 lbs (1 300 kg) with up to five occupants
or up to 3,500 lbs (1 575 kg) with up to two occupants.
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-40

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire Label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door, or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31. Do not
go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the
weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches
If you are using a weight-carrying or weight distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not
exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your
vehicle.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:

• If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg), use a properly
mounted, weight-carrying hitch and sway control
of the proper size. This equipment is very important
for proper vehicle loading and good handling
while driving.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, remember to seal the holes when you
remove the hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-29. Dirt and water can, too.

4-41

Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not
try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

4-42

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-29. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Climate Control System
on page 3-28.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.

Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when you
are towing a trailer. And, because you are a good deal
longer, you will need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Following Distance

Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.

When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

4-43

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
extra wiring.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs (450 kg), drive in AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) or, as you need to, a lower gear. This
will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of
your transaxle.

4-44

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, do the
following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:

• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts,
cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a good idea to
review these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle may have a trailer wiring harness located
at the rear of your vehicle. To use the trailer wiring
harness, you need a converter kit. Contact your dealer
for more information.

4-45

✍ NOTES

4-46

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-22
Engine Coolant .............................................5-25
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-28
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-30
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36

Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-41
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-47
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-49
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-49
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking
Lamps .....................................................5-51
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-51
Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps .......................5-52
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-53
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires ..............................................................5-55
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-56
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-61
Check Tire Pressure System ..........................5-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-64
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-65
Buying New Tires .........................................5-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-68
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-68
5-1

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Tire Chains ..................................................5-70
Accessory Inflator .........................................5-70
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-72
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-72
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-74
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-80
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-84
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-88
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-94
Appearance Care ............................................5-95
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-95
Vinyl ...........................................................5-97
Leather .......................................................5-97
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-97
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-97
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-98
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-98
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-98
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-98
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-99
Finish Care ..................................................5-99

5-2

Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .........5-99
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............5-100
Tires .........................................................5-100
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-101
Finish Damage ...........................................5-101
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-101
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-101
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-102
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-103
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-103
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-103
Electrical System ..........................................5-104
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-104
Headlamp Wiring ........................................5-104
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-104
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-104
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-105
Floor Console Fuse Block ............................5-105
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-107
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-112

Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.

5-3

Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-12.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-82.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.

5-4

{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.

Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3400 V6 engine, use regular
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher.
If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill
is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary.
If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, use regular
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher.
However, for best performance and for trailer towing,
you may wish to use middle grade or premium unleaded
gasoline. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.

Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.

5-5

California Fuel

Additives

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-46. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that are
advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also,
your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.

5-6

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General
Motors does not recommend the use of such
gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the emission
control system may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for service.

5-7

Filling Your Tank

While refueling, hang the
tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the
cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right.

5-8

{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-98.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-46.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a light that will
come on in the message center to let you know your
gas cap is open. See Check Gas Cap Message
on page 3-57 for more information.

{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-46.

5-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

Checking Things Under
the Hood

{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

5-10

{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:

2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on the center of
the hood, and push the secondary hood release to
the right.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas struts
will automatically take over to lift and hold the
hood in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then, pull the hood down to close.

1. Pull the hood release handle, located under the
instrument panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

5-11

Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood of the 3400 V6 engine, here is what you will see:

5-12

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-107.
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
D. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-22.
E. Brake Master Cylinder. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-38.
F. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.

G. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
H. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-28.
I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
L. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25.

5-13

When you lift the hood of the 3.6L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

5-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
B. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-107.
C. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
E. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-28.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
I. Brake Master Cylinder. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-38.
J. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-22.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
L. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25.

5-15

Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

3400 V6 Engine

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

3.6L V6 Engine

5-16

When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one quart
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-112.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:

• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.

5-17

• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.

5-18

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. See Change Engine Oil Message on
page 3-55. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is
also important to check your oil regularly and keep it
at the proper level.

5-19

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset
the system.
If your vehicle does not have the optional Driver
Information Center (DIC), do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

5-20

If your vehicle has the optional DIC, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
2. Press the MODE button until the DIC reads OIL
LIFE LEFT/HOLD SET TO RESET.
3. Press and hold the SET button until 100% is
displayed.
You will hear three chimes and the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message will go off.
4. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the two clamps on the duct.
2. Remove the duct.

When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after
50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.

3400 V6 engine shown, 3.6 L V6 engine similar

5-21

3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the panel
with the slots at the bottom of the housing.
6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the
panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated
correctly in the slots.
7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.

{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.

5-22

How to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to drive longer.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust
system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

Checking the Fluid Level
To prepare your vehicle, do the following:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place and keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

5-23

Then, without shutting off the engine, do the following:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for information on dipstick location.

If your vehicle is equipped
with a 3.6L V6 engine, the
dipstick handle will
have this symbol on it.

If your vehicle is equipped
with a 3400 V6 engine, the
dipstick handle will be a
red loop.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds
and then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

5-24

How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid

Engine Coolant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the
dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transaxle fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:

•
•
•
•
•

Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning messages and gages work as
they should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-25

What Coolant to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

5-26

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank
is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle,
above the engine air
cleaner/filter. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is
warm, the level should be above the FULL COLD mark
or a little higher.

Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.

{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-30.

5-27

Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is a
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line
up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
The radiator pressure cap for the 3400 V6 engine and
the 3.6L V6 engine are located in different areas of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on
your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-46. You also have
an engine coolant temperature warning message on
your instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Message on page 3-52. If your vehicle is
equipped with the 3.6L V6 engine, you will have a
reduced engine power message as well. See Reduced
Engine Power Message on page 3-53.

5-28

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-30 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-30 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

•
•
•
•

Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while you are parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

5-29

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. If your vehicle is equipped with the
3.6L V6 engine, the reduced engine power message
along with the engine coolant temperature warning
message will come on to indicate the vehicle has
entered overheated engine protection operating mode.
The temperature gage will also indicate an overheat
condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16.

5-30

Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:

3400 V6 engine

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at or above the full cold
mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure
cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:
3.6 L V6 engine
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

5-31

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-30 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at or above the full cold mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for more information.

5-32

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or
above the full cold mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.

5-33

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator
fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-34

Housing

Bypass Tube

3. If your vehicle has the 3400 V6 engine, after the
engine cools, open the coolant air bleed valves.
There are two bleed valves. One is located on the
thermostat housing. The other is located on the
thermostat bypass tube.

5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air
bleed valve (if equipped), close the valve. Otherwise,
close the valves after the radiator is filled.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.

5-35

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the arrows on the pressure cap line up properly.

Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

9. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
10. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.

5-36

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

What Power Steering Fluid to Use

To check the power steering fluid, do the following:

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with
a clean rag.

Windshield Washer Fluid

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

What Washer Fluid to Use

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.

When the engine compartment is hot, the level for the
3400 V6 engine should be at the H (hot) mark, and
the level for the 3.6L V6 engine should be at the MAX
mark. When it is cold, the level for the 3400 V6
engine should be at the C (cold) mark, and the level for
the 3.6L V6 engine should be at the MIN mark. If the
fluid is at the ADD mark on the 3400 V6 engine,
you should add fluid. If the level falls below the MIN
mark on the 3.6L V6 engine, you should add fluid.

5-37

Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.

Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-38

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-44.

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See
Appearance Care on page 5-95.

5-39

Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.

5-40

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.

Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.

Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.

{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-132.

5-41

Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.

5-42

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump starting procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

Pull up on the cap to
access the remote
positive (+) terminal. You
should always use the
remote positive (+) terminal
instead of the positive (+)
terminal on the battery.

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet(s). Turn off
the radios and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal for that purpose. The terminal is
located under a tethered cap at the front of the
underhood fuse and relay center. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.

{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

5-43

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.

5-44

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the ECM,
ECM mounting bracket or any cables that attach
to the ECM bracket, you may damage the ECM.
Attach the negative cable to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part, other than the ECM, ECM bracket
or cables attached to the ECM bracket.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.

5-45

Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-46

All-Wheel Drive

How to Check Lubricant

If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
All-wheel-drive vehicles have two additional systems that
need lubrication.

Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.

What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-47

Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear
Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.

5-48

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug
hole. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and
have it repaired, if needed.

What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-53.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Push in on the
headlamp panel and lift
up the headlamp
retaining clip partway,
but do not remove.

{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
3. Remove the wing stud on the upper, outboard side
of the lamp assembly.
4. Unsnap the headlamp assembly by pulling it
forward, away from the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector by pulling back
on the locking tab, located on the electrical
connector, to separate the two connectors.

5-49

6. Turn the bulb socket
one-quarter of a turn
clockwise.

8. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the
gray tabs and separate the connector from the
bulb base.
9. Install the appropriate new bulb into the electrical
connector. Push the bulb firmly enough so that the
gray tabs hook over the tab on the bulb.
10. Put the bulb assembly back into the lamp housing
and turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn
counterclockwise.
11. Align the retaining clips on the back of the headlamp
with the rectangular holes in the mounting panel.

7. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp housing.

12. Push firmly on both ends of the headlamp to snap it
into position.
13. Push the retaining clip down to its original position.
14. Reinstall the wing stud.

5-50

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps

3. Pull the lamp directly rearward from the vehicle.

To replace the front turn signal, parking or sidemarker
lamp bulbs, follow the headlamp bulb replacement
procedure and replace the appropriate bulb.

5. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp housing.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps

7. Install the new bulb into the electrical connector.
Push the bulb firmly enough so that the tabs hook
over the tab on the bulb.

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-11 for
more information.
2. Remove the two
screws on the inboard
taillamp panel.

4. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn
counterclockwise.
6. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the tabs
and separate the connector from the bulb base.

8. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
9. Reinstall the lamp to its pocket by lining up the
mounting pin and pushing forward to set the
position.
10. Reinstall the screws removed in Step 2.
11. Close the liftgate.

5-51

Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps
This procedure is for the liftgate-mounted taillamps and
back-up lamps.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-11 for
more information.
2. Remove the panel inside the liftgate by lifting the
tabs and pulling the panel off.
3. Remove the seven
wing nuts and the four
outboard nuts (two
at each end).

A. Outboard Taillamp
B. Center Taillamp
C. Inboard Back-Up Lamp
6. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn
counterclockwise.
4. Gently lower the liftgate.
5. Pull the lamp assembly directly rearward from the
vehicle.

7. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp housing.
8. Pull the bulb out of the base.
9. Install the new bulb into the electrical connector.
Push the bulb firmly enough so that the tabs hook
over the tab on the bulb.

5-52

10. Put the bulb assembly back into the lamp housing
and turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn
clockwise.

Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement

11. Replace the applique on the liftgate.

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” under Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8
for more information.

12. Gently lift the liftgate.
13. Reinstall the seven wing nuts and the four
outboard nuts.
14. Reinstall the panel inside the liftgate by connecting
the tabs.
15. Close the liftgate.

Here’s how to replace the windshield wiper blades:

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps
Headlamps
High-beam
Low-beam
Liftgate-Mounted
Back-Up Lamps
Taillamps
Rear Outboard Stop/Tail/Turn
Sidemarker Lamps

Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13.
1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.

Bulb Number
3457K
9005
9006

2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wipe pattern. The blades
are more accessible for removal/replacement while
in this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.

921
161
3057K
168

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
5-53

To replace the backglass mounted wiper blade, do the
following:
1. Turn the rear wiper off.
2. Pull the wiper away from the backglass.
3. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting
point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the
blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it
from the wiper arm.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip click into place.
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.
4. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting
point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the
blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it
from the wiper arm.
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip click into place.
6. Push the release clip, from Step 4, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.

5-54

Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-31.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-61.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.

5-55

Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
5-56

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-67.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.

Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-94
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-72.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-57

Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.

(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C
of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 60 percent as high as it is wide.

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.

5-58

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.

5-59

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-61 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
5-60

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-65.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-67.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:

•
•
•
•

Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-94.
5-61

How to Check

Check Tire Pressure System

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).

Your vehicle may have a check tire pressure system
that can alert you to a large change in the pressure of
one tire. The system won’t alert you before you drive
that a tire is low or flat. You must begin driving before
the system will work properly.

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

5-62

The LOW TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO RESET
message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) and the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message
will come on the message center if pressure difference, or
low pressure, is detected in one tire. In the following
conditions, the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message may not
come on even if the tire pressure is low, or it may come
on when the tire pressure is actually normal:

• More than one tire is low
• Only one tire is replaced with a new tire
during service

• The vehicle is moving faster than
70 mph (113 km/h)

•
•
•
•
•

The system is not yet calibrated
The tire treadwear is uneven
The compact spare tire is installed
Tire chains are being used
The vehicle is being driven on a rough or frozen road

If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on,
the check tire pressure system may not be working
properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45.
The check tire pressure system detects differences
in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes
in tire pressure. The system can alert you about a low
tire – but it does not replace normal tire maintenance.
See Tires on page 5-55.
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO
RESET message appears on the Driver Information
Center and the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message comes
on the message center, you should stop as soon as
you can and check all your tires for damage. If a tire is
flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-72. Also check
the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure or have one or more
tires repaired or replaced, you’ll need to reset, or
calibrate, the check tire pressure system. You’ll also need
to reset the system whenever you rotate the tires, buy
new tires and install or remove the compact spare.
Do not reset the check tire pressure system without first
correcting the cause of the problem and checking
and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset
the system when the tire pressures are incorrect,
the check tire pressure system will not work properly
and may not alert you when a tire is low or high.

To reset the system, do the following:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON.
2. Press the MODE button until the DIC reads LOW
TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO RESET.
3. Press and hold the SET button until you hear a
chime, and TIRE PRESSURE RESET is displayed.
You will hear three chimes, then the LOW TIRE
PRESSURE message will go off and the DIC will return
to TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL. If the LOW TIRE
PRESSURE message comes back on, the check tire
pressure system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
The system completes the calibration process during
driving. The system learns the pressure at each tire
throughout the operating speed range of your vehicle.
The system normally takes between 30 and 60 minutes of
driving to learn the tire pressures. The system normally
takes 10 to 20 minutes of driving in each speed range to
learn tire pressures. The speed ranges are 20 to 40 mph
(32 to 64 km/h), 40 to 60 mph (64 to 96 km/h), and above
60 mph (96 km/h). This time may be longer depending on
your individual driving habits. The learning process does
not need to be completed during a single trip. Once
learned, the system will remember the tire pressure until
the system is reset.

5-63

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-65 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-68 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire, If it moves,
use the folding wrench to tighten the cable. See Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-88.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Reset the check tire pressure system, if equipped. See
Check Tire Pressure System on page 5-62.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-112.

5-64

When It Is Time for New Tires

{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-72.

One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-65

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the tire and loading information label. For
more information about this label and its location on
your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

{CAUTION:

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your
tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number
will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-94.

If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-66

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-67

Temperature – A, B, C

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.

5-68

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-72 for more
information.

5-69

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the front
tires for front-wheel-drive vehicles. If your
vehicle has all-wheel drive, install traction
devices on either the front tires or all four
tires, but never on the rear tires only.

5-70

Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator. With it, you
can inflate things like air mattresses and basketballs, and
you can also use it to bring your tires up to the proper
pressure.
The accessory inflator is located in the rear
compartment on the driver’s side. To remove the cover,
pull the tab on the cover and pull it off.
This is the symbol on the
accessory inflator switch.

There may be an accessory inflator kit stored in the
glove box. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air
pressure gage and nozzle adapters.

{CAUTION:

Your accessory inflator will automatically shut off after
about 10 minutes. The light in the switch will blink. After
about one minute you can use the system again. Press
the inflator switch and the indicator light will come on.

Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.

Notice: If you run the accessory inflator longer than
30 minutes at a time, you could damage the
inflator. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Run the inflator for short periods of
time only.

To use your accessory inflator system, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or ON.
2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required,
to the end of the hose that has the pressure gage.
3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet.
5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The light in the
switch will come on to show the system is working.

After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes, wait at
least 10 minutes before restarting the accessory inflator.
To turn off the inflator, do the following:
1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first from the
inflated object, then from the outlet.
2. Put the protective cap back on.
3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in
the glove box.
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the back of
the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to
secure the cover.

If the accessory inflator system does not turn on or the
light does not come on, the fuse may be blown or
installed incorrectly. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-105 or see your dealer for service.

5-71

If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.

5-72

{CAUTION:

When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.

5-73

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will
need is located in the
storage compartment on
the passenger’s side,
at the rear of the vehicle.

1. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting up the
tab and pulling the cover off.

D. Folding Wrench
A. Jack
E. Wing Nut
B. Wing Bolt
C. Jacking Instructions F. J-Hook
2. Remove the jack and jacking tools by turning the
wing bolt counterclockwise.
Lift up slightly on the jack to remove it from the
bracket. Then take it out of the storage compartment.
3. Separate the jack and remove the folding wrench
from the jack.

5-74

The tools you will be using include the jack (A), folding
wrench (B), wing nut (C), and J-hook (D).

Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles
without a Rear Convenience Center)
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle,
behind the rear bumper. Use the spare tire hoist to raise,
lower and store the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-94 for more information about the
compact spare.

A. Hoist Shaft
B. Folding Wrench
C. Hoist Assembly

D. Retainer
E. Compact Spare Tire

1. Flip the rear cargo area carpet cut out to expose
the hoist shaft.
2. Attach the folding wrench into the hoist shaft.
3. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the
wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.

5-75

4. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening to remove the spare tire from the cable.

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch may
be engaged causing the tire not to lower.

5. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back
up after removing the spare tire.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the
vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 5-88.

Do the following to check the cable:

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-80.

5-76

1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible.
2. If it is not visible, see Secondary Latch System on
page 5-84.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the folding wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten
the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable
all the way and then loosen it at least two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue
with Step 4 under “Removing the Spare Tire
(Vehicles without the Rear Convenience Center)”
listed previously.

Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with
a Rear Convenience Center)
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle,
ahead of the rear bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-94 for more information about the compact spare.

5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground,
see Secondary Latch System on page 5-84.

A. Rear Convenience
Center
B. Folding Wrench
C. Storage
Compartment
Cap Hole

D.
E.
F.
G.

Hoist Shaft
Compact Spare Tire
Retainer
Hoist Shaft
Assembly

5-77

1. Open the storage compartment door of the
convenience center that is nearest the liftgate and
remove the cap on the bottom of the storage
compartment.
2. Flip the cut out carpet that is located through the
hole of the storage compartment.
3. Attach the folding wrench into the hoist shaft.
4. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the
wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening to remove the spare tire from the cable.
6. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back
up after removing the spare tire.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the
vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 5-88.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-80.

5-78

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable
all the way and then loosen it at least two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue
with Step 5 under “Removing the Spare Tire
(Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)” listed
previously.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground,
see Secondary Latch System on page 5-84.

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch may
be engaged causing the tire not to lower.
Do the following to check the cable:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is
visible.
2. If it is not visible, see Secondary Latch System on
page 5-84.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the folding wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten
the cable.

5-79

Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. If there is a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut
caps with the wheel wrench. They will not come
off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench,
pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off.
Be careful; the edges may be sharp. Do not
try to remove the cover with your bare hands.
If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the
wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench.
2. Loosen the wheel
nuts — but do not
remove them — using
the folding wrench.
Turn the handle about
180 degrees, then
flip the handle back to
the starting position.
This avoids taking
the wrench off the lug
nut for each turn.

For wheels with a wheel lock key, use the wheel
lock key between the lock nut and folding wrench.
The key is supplied in the front passenger door
pocket.
5-80

Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and you
use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts,
you could damage the lock nut or wheel lock key.
Do not use an impact wrench to remove the
wheel nuts if your vehicle has wheel locks.
3. Locate the notch (A is
3.0 inches (7.5 cm)
from the front tire or B
is 5.5 inches (14.0
cm) from the rear tire).
The notch is located
near each wheel in the
vehicle’s body.

Notice: If you use a jack to raise the vehicle
without positioning it correctly, you could damage
your vehicle. When raising your vehicle on a
jack, avoid contact with the rear axle control arms.
Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare
tire near you.

{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.

{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.

4. Attach the folding
wrench to the jack, and
turn the wrench
clockwise to raise the
jack head 3 inches
(7.6 cm).

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding wrench
clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far
enough off the ground so that there is enough room
for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-81

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.

5-82

7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.

{CAUTION:

8. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wrench to
the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise.
Lower the jack completely.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-112 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-112 for the wheel nut
torque specification.

5-83

9. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
10. Do not try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover
securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the
flat tire repaired or replaced.

5-84

Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare
tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire
must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-88
for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.

{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
the following:

{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at
Step 3.

All-wheel-drive Vehicle shown
2. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

5-85

Front-wheel-drive Vehicle shown
3. Attach the folding wrench to the jack and raise the
jack at least 10 turns.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire.
5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. This
lets you know that the secondary latch has released
and the spare tire is balancing on the jack.
5-86

7. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack.

9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening when the spare tire has been completely
lowered.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back
up if the cable is hanging.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.

8. Disconnect the wrench from the jack and carefully
remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the
spare tire while firmly pulling the jack out from
under the spare tire with the other hand.

5-87

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles without
Stowable Seat and without Rear
Convenience Center)

1. Flip up the D-ring located in the rear cargo area.
2. Lay the tire in the rear cargo area of the vehicle with
the valve stem up with the center hole of the tire
over the D-ring.
For vehicles with aluminum wheels, remove the
center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the
folding wrench.
3. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back
of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and
the J-hook.
4. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring
through the center hole of the tire.
5. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the floor.
Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is
secure and does not move.

A. D-Ring
B. Wing Nut
C. J-Hook

5-88

D. Valve Stem
E. Full-Size Tire

6. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment cover
into the cover opening. Push the cover in place
and push down the tabs on the cover so that it rests
in the groove. This secures the cover in place.

Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles with a
Rear Convenience Center)

3. Lay the tire on top of the center storage
compartment with the valve stem down. Make sure
you can see the D-ring through the center hole
of the tire.
4. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back
of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and
the J-hook.
5. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring
through the center hole of the tire.
6. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the floor.
Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is
secure and does not move.

A. D-Ring
B. Rear Convenience
Center
C. Wing Nut
D. J-Hook

E. Full-Size Tire
F. Cap on Bottom of
Storage
Compartment

7. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment cover
into the cover opening. Push the cover in place
and push down the tabs on the cover so that it rests
in the groove. This secures the cover in place.

1. Open the center storage compartment door of the
rear convenience center.
2. Remove the cap on the bottom of the storage
compartment and flip the D-ring up.
5-89

Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles with a
Stowable Seat)

3. Flip the D-ring so it is pointing outward.
4. Open the convenience center cover.
5. Stand the full-size tire up, in the tray against the
back of the seat with the valve stem pointing out.
6. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back
of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and
the J-hook.
7. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring
through the center hole of the tire.
8. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the
seatback.
Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is
secure and does not move.

A. Rear Convenience
Center
B. Full-Size Tire
C. D-Ring

D.
E.
F.
G.

Stowable Seat Strap
Cargo Net Hook
J-Hook
Wing Nut

1. If the seatback is not in an upright position, move it
to an upright position.
2. There is a strap attached to each side of the
stowable seat. Hook the straps to the cargo
net hook in the rear of the vehicle.
5-90

9. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment cover
into the cover opening. Push the cover in place
and push down the tabs on the cover so that it rests
in the groove. This secures the cover in place.

Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles with a
Stowable Seatback Folded Flat)

3. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back
of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and
the J-hook.
4. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring
through the center hole of the tire.
5. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the
seatback.
6. Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is
secure and does not move.
7. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment cover
into the cover opening. Push the cover in place
and push down the tabs on the cover so that it rests
in the groove. This secures the cover in place.

A. Stowable Seat
B. Full-Size Tire
C. Wing Nut

D. J-Hook
E. D-Ring

1. Fold the seatback down and flip the D-ring up.
2. Lay the tire on the seatback with the valve stem
pointing up with the center hole of the tire over
the D-ring.

5-91

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.

The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing down. If
the spare tire is stored with the valve stem
pointing upwards, its secondary latch won’t
work properly and the spare tire could loosen
and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being driven,
the tire might contact a person or another
vehicle, causing injury and, of course, damage
to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with
its valve stem pointing down.
1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the
rear of the vehicle. Position the compact spare
tire so that the valve stem is pointed down facing
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Lower the cable to the ground. See Removing the
Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-74.

5-92

3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through the
center hole of the spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
4. Attach the folding wrench to the hoist shaft.
5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to lift the
spare tire.
6. When the tire reaches the stabilizer bar, move the
tire over the bar, then continue to turn the folding
wrench clockwise to lift the spare tire.
7. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn
the tire so that the valve stem is towards the rear of
the vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain tire
pressure in the spare.
8. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the folding wrench until
you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is
tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.

9. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the folding wrench to tighten the cable.
10. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
To put the cover back on, slip the tabs on the side
of the cover into the cover opening. Push the
cover in place and push down the tabs on the cover
so that it rests in the groove. This secures the
cover in place.
5-93

When you replace the compact spare with a full-size
tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap,
whichever your vehicle has. Tighten them hand tight
over the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.

Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is
made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or
replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace
your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your
spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you
need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

5-94

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.

All-Wheel Drive
After installing a compact spare tire on a vehicle with
all-wheel drive you will need to drive with light to
moderate acceleration, for 10 seconds, in a straight line.
This action will allow the vehicle to detect the compact
spare tire and disable the all-wheel drive system.
The AWD DISABLE message will come on in the
message center indicating that the all-wheel drive
system is off. You may detect a slight pull during this
time, but this is normal.
Notice: You may damage your vehicle’s all-wheel
drive system if your vehicle is driven for an
extended period with a compact spare tire installed
and the all-wheel drive system in operations. See
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-11 for
more information.

Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in a closed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:

•
•
•
•

Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents

Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:

•
•
•
•

Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-95

Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip
water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.

3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to the
fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.

Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.

Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.

5-96

Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.

Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
may have to be done more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.

Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.

Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.

5-97

Glass Surfaces

Weatherstrips

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102.

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle.

5-98

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-98.

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted

surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.

Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.

5-99

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.

5-100

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-101

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer

5-102

Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery, and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.

Description

Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one step.
Low Gloss
No wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
Spot Lifter
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.

Vehicle Identification

Engine Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the access panel
located on the driver’s side of the rear of the vehicle.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label, you will find the following:

•
•
•
•

VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

5-103

Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-82.

Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by internal fuses in
the fuse block. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to go off and remain off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.

5-104

Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the floor console fuse block protect
the power windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

Floor Console Fuse Block

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers,
and fusible thermal links.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick a feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter - and use its fuse, if it is the right amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the underhood fuse and relay
center.

The floor console fuse block is located to the left of the
glove box near the floor. Pull the door open to access
the fuse block.

5-105

Fuse
11
12
13
14
15

Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5-106

Usage
Empty
Steering Wheel Radio Controls
Power Door Locks
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Turn Signal and Hazard Lamp
Flashers

16
17
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32

Usage
Power Seats
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Compressor
Liftgate and Endgate
Rear Auxiliary Power Outlet
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Compressor Relay and Height
Sensor
Heated Mirrors
Power Mirrors
Ignition 1 Module
Turn Signal Switch
Rear Defogger
Air Bag Module
TCC Switch
HVAC Blower Motor
HVAC Mode and Temperature
Motors and Head-Up Display
Not Used
Windshield Wipers and Washer
Instrument Panel Cluster, Body
Control Module (BCM),
PASS-Key® III
Park Lock Ignition Key Solenoid
Rear Window Wiper/Washer

Fuse
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
46
Relay
20
23
27
33
43
45

Usage
Power Sunroof
Power Windows
Map Lamps, Courtesy Lamps and
Instrument Panel Lights
Radio
UQ3 Radio Amplifier
Head-Up Display
Hazard Flashers
Instrument Panel Cluster, Climate
Control, Security LED and Remote
Keyless Entry Mode
PASS-Key® III
Body Control Module (BCM)
Advanced Occupant System Module
Usage
Rear Defogger Relay
Ignition Relay
Accessory Relay
Retained Accessory Power Relay
Accessory Diode
Back-Up Lamps

Underhood Fuse Block

This fuse block is located in the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The back-up lamp relay (A) is located behind and to the
left of the underhood fuse block.
To remove the cover, press the two tabs in and lift up
the cover.

5-107

Fuse
9

3400 V6 Engine
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

5-108

Usage
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Horn
Engine Controls-Emissions and
Sensors
Power Control Module
(PCM)-Battery Power
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Control
Module
Transaxle Solenoids

10
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Usage
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Solenoid Valves
Oxygen Sensors-Emissions Control
Fuel Injectors
Engine Controls
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Passenger’s Low-Beam Headlamp
Driver’s Low-Beam Headlamp
Driver’s High-Beam Headlamp
Ignition Switch Battery Power
Parking Lamps
Passenger’s High-Beam Headlamp
Vent Solenoids
DVD
Front Fog Lamps
Ignition Relay, Neutral Start Switch,
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Body Control Module-Battery Power
S Band, Remote Digital Radio
Receiver
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Module
Cruise Control
Front Power Outlets/Lights, OnStar®

Fuse
33
34
35
38
39
40
41
44
46

70 §

Usage
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock
Control System
Starter Solenoid Battery Fuse
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Motor
Engine Cooling Fan 2
Engine Cooling Fan 1
Main Battery Fuse for Retained
Accessory Power Relay and
Accessory Relay
Main Battery Fuse for Heated Seats,
Air
Main Battery Fuse for Power
Outlets, Level Control, Power Seats
and Mirrors and Body Computer
Main Battery Fuse for Climate
Control Blower and Ignition 3 Relay
Main Battery Fuse for Ignition
Switch, Radio, Heads-Up Display,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
Instrument Cluster, Air Conditioning
and Body Computer
Diode for Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch

Relay
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61

Usage
Horn
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Clutch
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Low-Beam Headlamps
Parking Lamps
High-Beam Headlamps
Fog Lamps
Starter Relay
Cooling Fan
Ignition 1 Relay
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1

5-109

3.6L V6 Engine
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

5-110

Usage
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Horn
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Powertrain Relay
Powertrain Sensors
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Solenoids Valves

Fuse
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Usage
Oxygen Sensor/MAF Sensor
Fuel Injectors (Even)
Fuel Injectors (Odd)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Passenger’s Low-Beam Headlamp
Transmission
Driver’s Low-Beam Headlamp
Driver’s High-Beam Headlamp
Ignition Switch Battery Power
Parking Lamps
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Passenger’s High-Beam Headlamp
Vent Solenoids
DVD
Front Fog Lamps
Ignition Relay
Body Control Module (BCM)
S Band
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Module
Cruise Control
Front Power Outlets/Lights, OnStar®
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock
Control System
Starter Solenoid Battery Fuse

Fuse
35
38
39
40
41
44
46

§
§ 71
70

Usage
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Motor
Engine Cooling Fan 2
Engine Cooling Fan 1
Main Battery Fuse for Retained
Accessory Power Relay and
Accessory Relay
Main Battery Fuse for Heated Seats,
Air Conditioning, Defogger
Main Battery Fuse for Power
Outlets, Level Control, Power Seats,
Mirrors, and Body Computer
Main Battery Fuse for Climate
Control Blower and Ignition 3 Relay
Main Battery Fuse for Ignition
Switch, Radio, Heads-Up Display
(HUD), Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Instrument Cluster, Air
Conditioning, and Body Computer
Diode for Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
Diode for Ignition

Relay
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62

Usage
Horn
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Clutch
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Low-Beam Headlamps
Parking Lamps
High-Beam Headlamps
Fog Lamps
Starter Relay
Cooling Fan S/P
Powertrain
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Ignition

5-111

Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

English
1.7 lbs

Metric
0.8 kg

Automatic Transaxle – Front Wheel Drive
Pan Removal and Replacement
Complete Overhaul

7.4 quarts
10.0 quarts

7.0 L
9.5 L

Automatic Transaxle – 3400 V6 AWD
Pan Removal and Replacement
Complete Overhaul

8.7 quarts
10.8 quarts

8.3 L
10.3 L

Automatic Transaxle – 3.6L V6 AWD
Pan Removal and Replacement
Complete Overhaul
Cooling System

7.8 quarts
10.4 quarts
9.6 quarts

7.4 L
9.9 L
9.1 L

5-112

Capacities
Application
Engine Oil with Filter
3400 V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Fuel Capacity
Rear Differential Fluid Capacity
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity
Wheel Nut Torque

English

Metric

4.0 quarts
5.5 quarts
18.0 gallons
2.1 quarts
0.6 pints
100 ft lb

3.8 L
5.2 L
68.1 L
1.9 L
290 ml
140 Y

Engine Specifications
Engine

VIN Code

Transaxle

Spark Plug Gap

3400 V6

Automatic

0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

3.6L V6

Automatic

0.044 inches (1.1 mm)

5-113

✍ NOTES

5-114

Section 6

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Maintenance Record .....................................6-14

6-1

Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.

Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.

Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.

Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
6-2

We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we do not know exactly
how you will drive it. You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.

6-3

Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

6-4

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.

Scheduled Maintenance
Service

Maintenance I

Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service.

•

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).

•

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes †
and (l).

•

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-55.

•

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).

•

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.

•

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.

•

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).

•

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).

•

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).

•

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).

•

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).

•

Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.

•

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).

•

Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k).

•

6-5

Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)

25,000
(41 500)

50,000
(83 000)

75,000
(125 000)

100,000
(166 000)

125,000
(207 500)

150,000
(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.

•

Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.

•

Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
An Emission Control Service.

•

Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).

•

Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (normal service).

•

Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.

•

Engine cooling system service (or every
5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.

•

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts
or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job,
have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor
and release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding
seats and liftgate hinges. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better and
not stick or squeak.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.

6-7

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel Fill

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.

It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.

Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.

6-8

Engine Coolant Level Check

At Least Once a Year

Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for further details.

Starter Switch Check

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are inflated
to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check your
spare tire. See Tires on page 5-55 for further details.
Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire. If it moves,
tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-72.

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.

6-9

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer
for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-26 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.

6-10

lever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.

the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.

Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

6-11

Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench
oil meets all the requirements for your
vehicle. To determine the proper
viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,
see Engine Oil on page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only
Engine Coolant water
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent
Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
No. U.S. 89021184, in Canada
System
89021186).

6-12

Usage
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
Carrier
Assembly —
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module) and
Transfer Case
(Power Transfer
Unit)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Hood and Door
Hinges, Rear
Folding Seat
Weatherstrip
Conditioning

Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).

VERSATRAK™ Fluid (GM Part No.
U.S. 12378514, in Canada
88901045).

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
992723) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
GM® Part Number

ACDelco® Part Number

25099149

A1208C

25010792
89017342

PF47
PF61

52482929

—

Spark Plugs
3400 V6
3.6L V6

12568387
12565996

41–101
41–988

Windshield Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side – 24.0 inches (60.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)

10413111
10317151

—
—

Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
3400 V6
3.6L V6
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Kit

6-13

Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages.
Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Date

6-14

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

6-16

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

Section 7

Customer Assistance and Information

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ........................................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ................................................7-10

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-12
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-12

7-1

Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will
be resolved by your GM dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Buick Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number. This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel.

• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Buick, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.

Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance Offices
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
Buick, the letter should be addressed to Buick’s
Customer Assistance Center.

United States – Customer Assistance
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

7-4

Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program

Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance

This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or
to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.

7-5

Roadside Assistance Program
Call 1-800-252-1112 for Buick Roadside Assistance.
As the proud owner of a new Buick vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Buick Roadside Assistance
program. This value-added service is intended to provide
you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel
the open road. Call Buick’s Roadside Assistance toll-free
number at 1-800-252-1112 to speak with a Buick
Roadside Assistance representative 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel, $5
maximum, for the customer to get to the nearest
service station.

• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.

7-6

• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.

• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Buick’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:

• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.

•
•
•
•

Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Telephone number of your location.
Location of the vehicle.

Courtesy Transportation

Model, year, color, and license plate number.

Buick has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.

Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number, and delivery
date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Buick Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112, text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Buick reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Buick’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
7-7

Scheduling Service Appointments

Transportation Options

When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Buick helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.

Shuttle Service

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service
to get to your destination with minimal interruption of your
daily schedule. This includes a one way or round trip
shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the
dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five day maximum may be
available for the use of public transportation such as a
taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five day maximum
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.

7-8

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Additional Program Information

Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30 a day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.

Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not
part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate
booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information furnished with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage information.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.

7-9

Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision.

7-10

This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.

Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.

7-11

Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government

Service Publications Ordering
Information

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Service Manuals

Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a
situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-12

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.

Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

Current and Past Model Order Forms

Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

7-13

✍ NOTES

7-14

A
About Driving Your Vehicle .....................................ii
Accessory Inflator ........................................... 5-70
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-26
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-82
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-104
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21
Air Conditioning .............................. 3-28, 3-30, 3-33
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-42
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-41
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ....... 7-10
Airbag System ................................................ 1-67
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-82
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-75
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-77
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-82
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-75
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-76
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-73
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-70
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-47

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-26
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message .......... 3-57
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-11
Antenna, Integrated Windshield ....................... 3-135
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ........................................ 3-135
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-45
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-95
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-100
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-98
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-101
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-99
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-95
Finish Care ................................................. 5-99
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-101
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-98
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-97
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-97
Leather ...................................................... 5-97
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-101
Tires ........................................................ 5-100
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-101
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-102
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-98

Appearance Care (cont.)
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-98
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-99
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-27
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-75
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-133
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-134
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-135
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-135
Integrated Windshield Antenna ..................... 3-135
Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-130
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-87
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-76
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-100
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-130
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-76
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-132
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-134
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-135
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-22
Operation ................................................... 2-23

B
Battery .......................................................... 5-41
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-23
Bench Seat, Split ............................................. 1-8
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-9
Low Fluid Warning Message ......................... 3-59
Parking ...................................................... 2-26
System Warning Light .................................. 3-44
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-49
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking
Lamps .................................................... 5-51
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-49
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-53
Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps ....................... 5-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............ 5-51
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-66

C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-112
Captain Chairs, Rear ....................................... 1-13
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-11, 2-29, 4-26, 4-38
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-98
Your Cassette Tape Player .......................... 3-134
Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-135
Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-135
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-43
Cargo Lamp ................................................... 3-19
Cell Phone Storage Area ................................. 2-39
Center Rear Passenger Position, Safety Belts ..... 1-38
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-70
Change Engine Oil Message ............................ 3-55
Charging System Indicator Message .................. 3-53
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-46
Tire Pressure System ................................... 5-62
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-101
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-48

Child Restraints (cont.)
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-45
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-58
Older Children ............................................. 1-43
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 1-62
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ........................................... 1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ........................................... 1-64
Top Strap ................................................... 1-53
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-54
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-52
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-27
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-100
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-99
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-95
Finish Care ................................................. 5-99
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-98
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-97
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-97
Leather ...................................................... 5-97

Cleaning (cont.)
Tires ........................................................ 5-100
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-101
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-97
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-98
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-98
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-99
Climate Control System ................................... 3-28
Dual .......................................................... 3-30
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-33
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-36
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-40
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-94
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-15
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convenience Center, Rear ............................... 2-44
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-43
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-46
Engine Temperature Warning Message ........... 3-52
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-22
SGCM, Surge Tank Pressure Cap .................. 3-51
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-10
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-39
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-11
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-12

D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-3
Delayed Lighting ............................................. 3-18
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Door
Ajar Warning Message ................................. 3-56
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9

Door (cont.)
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Driver
Four-Way Manual Seat .................................. 1-3
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-25
Driver Behavior ................................................ 4-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-62
DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-64
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-66
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-17
City ........................................................... 4-21
Defensive ..................................................... 4-3
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Environment ................................................. 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-18
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-31
Winter ........................................................ 4-26
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-33
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-30
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-115

E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-104
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................... 5-105
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 5-104
Power Windows and Other Power Options ....... 5-104
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-107
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-104
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21
Battery ....................................................... 5-41
Change Oil Message ................................... 3-55
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-46
Coolant ...................................................... 5-25
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-22
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-46
Coolant Temperature Warning Message .......... 3-52
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-29
Low Oil Level Message ................................ 3-55
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-30

Engine (cont.)
Overheating ................................................
Reduced Power Message .............................
Starting ......................................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................
Exit Delay, Headlamp ......................................
Exit Lighting ...................................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................

5-28
3-53
2-21
3-17
7-10
3-17
3-18
1-42
3-14

F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-101
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-72
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-72
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-88
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Four-Way Manual Driver Seat ............................ 1-3

Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-40
Front Console Storage Area ............................. 2-39
Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-19
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-50
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Message ................................. 3-58
Fuses
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................... 5-105
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-107
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-104

G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................

3-46
3-50
3-39
3-40

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-34
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-38
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5

H
Hatch Ajar Warning Message ............................ 3-56
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 5-104
Headlamps
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-49
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-14
Exit Delay .................................................. 3-17
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-51
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-49
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8

Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-21
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Heater ................................................... 3-28, 3-30
Heater ........................................................... 3-33
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-49
Highbeam Out Warning Message ...................... 3-61
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-34
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-35
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-25

I
Ignition Positions .............................................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...............
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ..................................
Instrument Panel
Brightness ..................................................
Cluster .......................................................

2-20
1-45
5-61
3-16
3-38

Instrument Panel (cont.)
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Switchbank ................................................. 3-20
Integrated Windshield Antenna ........................ 3-135
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-16
Interior Lamps Control ..................................... 3-16

J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42

K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5
Keys ............................................................... 2-3

L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall ....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Cargo ........................................................
Exterior ......................................................
Fog ...........................................................

5-56
3-20
3-19
3-14
3-15

Lamps (cont.)
Front Reading .............................................
Interior .......................................................
Interior Control ............................................
Rear Reading .............................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Level Control ..................................................
Liftgate ..........................................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................
Safety Belt Reminder ...................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..........
Lighting
Delayed .....................................................
Entry .........................................................
Exit ...........................................................
Perimeter ...................................................

3-19
3-16
3-16
3-19
1-58
1-60
4-38
2-11
3-41
3-45
3-44
3-49
3-46
3-42
3-41
3-45
3-45
3-18
3-17
3-18
3-19

Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Low Brake Fluid Warning Message .................... 3-59
Low Engine Oil Level Message ......................... 3-55
Low Fuel Warning Message ............................. 3-58
Low Oil Pressure Message ............................... 3-54
Low Tire Message .......................................... 3-56
Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ................. 3-58
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-5

M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ...........................
At Each Fuel Fill ...........................................
At Least Once a Month ..................................
At Least Once a Year ....................................

6-6
6-8
6-9
6-9

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-46
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-5
Manual Passenger Seat .................................... 1-3
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-47
Message
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning .................... 3-57
Center ....................................................... 3-51
Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-55
Charging System Indicator ............................ 3-53
Door Ajar Warning ....................................... 3-56
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-52
Highbeam Out Warning ................................ 3-61
Low Brake Fluid Warning .............................. 3-59
Low Engine Oil Level ................................... 3-55
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-58

Message (cont.)
Low Oil Pressure ......................................... 3-54
Low Tire ..................................................... 3-56
Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-58
Park Lamp Warning ..................................... 3-61
PASS-Key® III Security ................................. 3-57
Program Mode ............................................ 3-60
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning .............................. 3-56
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-53
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery
Low Warning ........................................... 3-60
Service Traction System Warning ................... 3-51
Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-59
Traction Active ............................................ 3-52
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-32
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-32
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-32
Outside Power Mirror ................................... 2-31
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

N
Navigation/Radio System ................................ 3-130
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13

O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-39
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-39
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-14
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Message ....................................... 3-54
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-43
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-33
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-36
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-32
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-32
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-32
Power Mirror ............................................... 2-31
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-39
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-30
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

P
Park Aid ........................................................ 3-24
Park Lamp Warning Message ........................... 3-61
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-27
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-28
Parking
Assist ........................................................ 3-24
Brake ........................................................ 2-26
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-42
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-77
Passing ......................................................... 4-14
PASS-Key® III ................................................ 2-17
PASS-Key® III Operation .................................. 2-18
PASS-Key® III Security Message ....................... 3-57
Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-19
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-26
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-104
Reduced Engine Message ............................ 3-53
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-21
Six-Way Seats .............................................. 1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-14

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................
Program Mode Message ..................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ...........

1-42
3-60
2-10
2-35

Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-24

R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-28
Radios .......................................................... 3-75
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-134
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-135
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-135
Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-130
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-87
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-76
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-100
Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-130
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-76
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-132
Understanding Reception ............................ 3-134
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message .................... 3-56

Rear Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-19
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-40
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-130
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-115
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-34
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-40
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-31
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-36
Reduced Engine Power Message ...................... 3-53
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery
Low Warning Message ................................. 3-60
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-74
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-53
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-12
General Motors ........................................... 7-12
United States Government ............................ 7-11
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-83

Restraint System Check (cont.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-83
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-83
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-83
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ......... 1-34
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-31
Roof Rack System .......................................... 2-40
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-30

S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners ..............................................
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Center Rear Passenger Position ....................
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .....

1-42
3-41
5-98
1-38
1-25
1-25
1-24

Safety Belts (cont.)
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-40
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-34
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-34
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-42
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-34
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-20
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-33
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Captain Chairs ............................................ 1-13
Four-Way Manual Driver Seat ......................... 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-5
Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-47
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Six-Way Power Seats .................................... 1-4
Split Bench Seats ......................................... 1-8
Stowable Seat ............................................ 1-17
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-84

Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-62
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-60
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-60
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-64
Security Message, PASS-Key® III ...................... 3-57
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-46
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-12
Traction System Warning Message ................. 3-51
Vehicle Soon Message ................................. 3-59
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-82
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-76
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-101
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-28
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-33
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire
Installing .................................................... 5-80
Removing ................................................... 5-74
Storing ....................................................... 5-88

Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-112
Speedometer .................................................. 3-39
Split Bench Seats ............................................. 1-8
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21
Steering ........................................................ 4-12
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-133
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Cell Phone Storage Area .............................. 2-39
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-43
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-39
Floor Console Storage Area .......................... 2-39
Front Armrest Storage Area ........................... 2-40
Glove Box .................................................. 2-38
Overhead Console ....................................... 2-39
Rear Convenience Center ............................. 2-44
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-40
Roof Rack System ....................................... 2-40
Stowable Seat ................................................ 1-17
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-47
Surge Tank Pressure Cap, SGCM Coolant ......... 3-51
Switchbanks, Instrument Panel .......................... 3-20

T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-40
Taillamps
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-52
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-51
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-45
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-132
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-15
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-15
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-17
PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tire
Low Message ............................................. 3-56
Tires ............................................................. 5-55
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ............................................... 5-100
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-66
Chains ....................................................... 5-70
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-72
Check Tire Pressure System ......................... 5-62
Cleaning ................................................... 5-100
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-94
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-72
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-61

Tires (cont.)
Inspection and Rotation ................................
Installing the Spare Tire ................................
Removing the Flat Tire .................................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...............
Secondary Latch System ..............................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............
Tire Sidewall Labelling ..................................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ....................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .........................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .................
Wheel Replacement .....................................
When It Is Time for New Tires ......................
Top Strap ......................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ...............................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .....................................
Towing a Trailer ..........................................
Your Vehicle ...............................................
Traction
Active Message ...........................................
Control System (TCS) ..................................
Control System Warning Light .......................
Service Traction System Warning Message .....
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ...........................................

5-64
5-80
5-80
5-74
5-84
5-88
5-56
5-58
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-65
1-53
1-54
4-36
4-38
4-36
3-52
4-10
3-45
3-51

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-23
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-39
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-24
Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-134
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-67

V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Design ......................................................... 4-2
Service Soon Message ................................. 3-59
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................. 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-103
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-103

5-22

Vehicle Personalization
DIC ...........................................................
Memory Seat ..............................................
Ventilation Adjustment ......................................
Visors ...........................................................

3-66
2-47
3-36
2-15

W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-37
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washer Fluid Low Warning Message ................. 3-58
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-68
Replacement ............................................... 5-68
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-52
Windows ....................................................... 2-13

Windows (cont.)
Power ........................................................ 2-14
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .......... 5-99
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-37
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-53
Fuses ...................................................... 5-104
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26

X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-135

Y
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ............. 4-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Modified                        : 2014:11:03 09:55:08.857-05:00
Creator                         : EDS
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 3123620
Author                          : EDS
Sha 1                           : 7f52956797e9811ae72784df0eb5eee7cfac6e3a
Extracted                       : 2014:11:02 09:59:04.633-06:00
Modify Date                     : 2004:05:20 07:40:24-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:05:20 07:40:24-05:00
Create Date                     : 2004:05:19 03:07:14-05:00
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Producer                        : 
Keywords                        : 
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2005/buick/rendezvous
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 480

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Buick Owner's Manual 2005 Rendezvous Owners

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation